final bid specs 09328.pdf - Freese and Nichols, Inc.

STEVENS PARK GOLF COURCE MAINTENANCE FACILITY
CITY OF DALLAS PARK AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 3
CONCRETE
Section
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
DIVISION 5
METALS
Section
05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6
WOODS AND PLASTIC
Section
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork
06 64 00 Plastic Paneling
DIVISION 7
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section
07 92 00 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8
OPENINGS
Section
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors
08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors
08 71 00 Door Hardware
08 90 00 Louvers and Vents
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
Section
09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing
09 29 00 Gypsum Board
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories
09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring
09 91 13 Exterior Painting
09 91 23 Interior Painting
09 96 00 High Performance Coatings
DIVISION 10
SPECIALTIES
Section
Table of Contents TOC - 1
DPR09328

10 28 00 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
10 44 13 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section
13 34 19 Metal Building Systems
13 85 10 Fire Sprinkler Monitoring System
DIVISION 21
FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section
21 11 00 Facility Fire Suppression Water Service Piping
21 13 13 Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
DIVISION 22
PLUMBING
Section
22 00 01 Plumbing Systems
DIVISION 23
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Section
23 00 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
23 05 53 Mechanical Identification
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
23 07 13 Duct Insulation
23 07 19 Pipe Insulation
23 31 13 Metal Ducts
23 33 00 Duct Accessories
23 34 23 Power Ventilators
23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
23 81 26 Split-System Air-Conditioning Units
23 82 39.16 Propeller Unit Heaters
DIVISION 26
ELECTRICAL
Section
26 05 00 Common Work Results For Electrical
26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables
26 05 19.01 Wire Connections and Devices
26 05 26 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 33.01 Conduits
26 05 33.02 Wireways
26 05 33.03 Outlet Boxes
26 05 33.04 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
26 05 73.01 Electrical Power System Studies
26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices
Table of Contents TOC - 2
DPR09328

26 24 16 Lighting and Branch Panelboards
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 28 00 Low Voltage Protective Devices
26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers
26 41 13 Lightning Protection for Structures
26 50 00 Lighting
DIVISION 31
EARTHWORK
Section
31 05 13 Earth Fill Classifications
31 23 10 Structural Excavation and Backfill
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents TOC - 3
DPR09328

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mix design, placement procedures, curing and finishes.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or as specifically allowed in combination with
one or more of blended hydraulic cement and fly ash.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
1. Mix design: For each concrete mix, complete the form “Concrete Mix Design” and one of
the following forms: “Documentation of Average Strength – Field Strength Test Record”
or “Documentation of Average Strength – Trial Mixtures”.
a. Submit mix design supporting documentation and calculations as required.
B. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings for record purposes only: Details of fabrication, bending,
and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement,
and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required
for openings through concrete structures.
C. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Form materials and form-release agents.
3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
4. Admixtures.
5. Waterstops.
6. Curing materials.
7. Bonding agents.
8. Adhesives.
9. Vapor retarders.
10. Epoxy joint filler.
11. Joint-filler strips.
12. Repair materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 1
DPR09328

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's
Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and the Engineer, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to
conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand
from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture
from the same manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
1.06 STANDARDS
Mixing, sampling, placing, curing and testing of concrete, and the materials used shall be in compliance
with the latest revisions of the following standards, unless otherwise noted in the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall maintain one (1) copy of each of the applicable standards at
the construction field office.
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards:
ACI 117
ACI 211.1
ACI 214
ACI 223
ACI 301
ACI 302
ACI 304
ACI 304.2R
ACI 305R
ACI 306R
ACI 308
ACI 309
ACI 318
Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy-weight,
and Mass Concrete
Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results
Standard Practice for Use of Shrinkage Compensating Concrete
Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings
Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting & Placing Concrete
Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods
Hot Weather Concreting
Cold Weather Concreting
Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 2
DPR09328

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.02 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true,
and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding
specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist
plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete
surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling
of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
2.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
1. Provide only in locations specifically allowed.
2.04 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according
to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiberreinforced
concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 3
DPR09328

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,
use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
2.05 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, of the size scheduled and as follows:
1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M.
2. ASTM C33 Size Number: 4 or 467.
3. ASTM C33 Size Number: 5, 56 or 57.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregate for Slab-on-Grade: ASTM C 33, combined gradations as follows:
1. 8% to 18% for 1-1/2 inch stone
2. 8% to 22% for ¾ inch or 1 inch stone
3. 8% to 15% for #30 and #50 sieve
4. 0% to 4% on top size sieve
5. 1-1/2% to 5% on the #100 sieve
D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
2.06 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent watersoluble
chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures
and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or G.
E. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
2.07 WATERSTOPS
A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Self-expanding strip waterstops shall be used only where
specifically indicated. Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite or
other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete.
1. Products:
a. Adeka Ultra Seal; Mitsubishi International Corporation.
2.08 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 4
DPR09328

1. Available Products:
a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra A.
b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15.
c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-105.
d. Stego Wrap (15-mil) Vapor Barrier; STEGO INDUSTRIES LLC
2.09 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
1. Products:
a. Cimfilm; Axim Concrete Technologies.
b. Finishing Aid Concentrate; Burke Group, LLC (The).
c. Spray-Film; ChemMasters.
d. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
e. Sure Film; Dayton Superior Corporation.
f. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co.
g. Vapor Aid; Kaufman Products, Inc.
h. Lambco Skin; Lambert Corporation.
i. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
j. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc.
k. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries.
l. Rich Film; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
m. SikaFilm; Sika Corporation.
n. Finishing Aid; Symons Corporation.
o. Certi-Vex EnvioAssist; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
18 to 22 percent solids.
1. Products:
a. Klear Kote WB II 20 percent; Burke Chemicals.
b. Safe-Cure & Seal 20; ChemMasters.
c. Conspec 21; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co.
e. SureCure Emulsion; Kaufman Products Inc.
f. Glazecote Sealer-20; Lambert Corporation.
g. Dress & Seal WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
h. Vocomp-20; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
i. Metcure 0800; Metalcrete Industries.
j. Cure & Seal 200E; Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 5
DPR09328

k. Rich Seal 18 percent E; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
l. Kure-N-Seal W; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
m. Florseal W.B.; Sternson Group.
n. Cure & Seal 18 percent E; Symons Corporation.
o. Seal Cure WB STD; Tamms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals
of North America, Inc.
p. Hydro Seal 800; Unitex.
q. Starseal 0800; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
2.10 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self-expanding cork.
B. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A
hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
D. Zinc Rich Primer: Aluminum surfaces which contact or are embedded in concrete shall be
coated with zinc rich primer. Primer shall be Tneme-Zinc.
2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that
can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.12 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory
trial mix or field test data bases according to the provisions of ACI 318.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs
for the laboratory trial mix basis.
C. Performance Requirements:
Aggregate
Class Location
28-Day
Compressive
Strength
(psi)
Slump
(inches)
Size
(Max./
ASTM
C33)
A All concrete 4000 4 1½” / 467
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 6
DPR09328

B Not Used 3000 6 1½” / 467
C Not Used 3000 5 1” / 57
D Not Used 4000 5 1” / 57
E Not Used 4000 4 1½” / 467
1. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8
inches after admixture is added to concrete with initial slump of 2- to 4-inch.
D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1. Paste Fraction: 25 to 38% by volume
a. Paste fraction is the ratio of paste volume to the total mix volume.
b. Paste is defined as the cementitious materials + entrained air + water.
2. Mortar Fraction: 55 to 57% by volume
a. Mortar Fraction is the ratio of Mortar to the total mix volume.
b. Mortar is defined as the Paste + W.
c. Where W(fine aggregate) is that portion of the combined aggregates passing the #8
sieve.
3. Coarseness Factor: 50 to 75%
a. Coarseness Factor is defined as: Q / (Q + I)
b. Where Q (coarse aggregate) is the percentage of the combined aggregate greater
than 3/8-inch and I (intermediate aggregate) is the percentage of the combined aggregate
between the 3/8-inch and #8 sieves.
4. Workability Factor: 32 to 42%
a. Workability factor is defined as: W / (Q + I + W)
E. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
F. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete
at point of placement having an air content of 2 to 4 percent, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Exterior Concrete: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result
in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance
of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
G. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow
entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent.
H. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
cement.
I. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer)
in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 7
DPR09328

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.”
2.14 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94,
and furnish batch ticket information.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 FORMWORK
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes with or 45 minutes without set retarding admixtures.
2. Batch tickets shall be required for each truck and shall be in accordance with ASTM C94,
Section 16. Each delivery ticket must show plainly the amount of water, in gallons, that
can be added to the mixer truck at the site without exceeding the maximum water cement
ratio approved for that mix design. Amount of water added must be in proportion to contents
of truck.
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete
structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation,
and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view:
a. Class A, 1/8 inch.
2. For concrete surfaces not exposed to view:
a. Class D, 1 inch.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts
for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations
and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced
to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 8
DPR09328

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks
and maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.
3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that
does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or
laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces
unless approved by Architect.
E. Where aluminum anchors, aluminum shapes, or aluminum electrical conduits are embedded
in concrete, paint aluminum contact surfaces with zinc rich primer. Allow the paint to thoroughly
dry before placing the aluminum in contact with the concrete.
3.04 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Granular fill below the vapor retarder shall be smoothed and free of protrusions that might
damage or rupture the polyethylene film. Completely cover porous fill with film. Lap film not
less than 6” at all joints, with the top placed in the direction of concrete spreading. Use pressure-sensitive
tape at all laps of vapor barrier. Lap reinforcement directly over film before
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 9
DPR09328

placing concrete, taking precautions to prevent film punctures. Carefully cut film around
pipes and wiring outlets, and then apply pressure sensitive tape around these protrusions to
insure maximum barrier effectiveness.
3.05 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement” for placing
reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
weld crossing reinforcing bars.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of
adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
3.06 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction
joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides
of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least
one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with early entry dry-cut power saws within 2-hours
of finishing operations. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not
tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction
cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams,
and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 10
DPR09328

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints
where indicated.
3.07 WATERSTOPS
1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.
A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening
and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.08 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site unless prior approval has been
provided by the Engineer and only as allowed by ACI 301 and the approved mix design.
1. If high-range water-reducing admixtures are allowed, do not add water to concrete after
adding admixtures to the mix.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a
section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete
to avoid segregation.
D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to
avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to
avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator.
Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding
layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose
plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate
concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing mix constituents to segregate.
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits
of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface
plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on
the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 11
DPR09328

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or
low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less
than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as
follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time
of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid
nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.09 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie
holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding
ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged
in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes
and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating or covering
material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster,
or painting.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across
adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 12
DPR09328

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor
and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or
membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free
of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects
that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view
or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage
membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled
freestanding 10-foot- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere
on the surface, does not exceed the following:
a. 3/16 inch.
D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle
broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with
Architect before application.
3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after
work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with
in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations
as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations
in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry,
or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/ft 2 /hr before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding,
and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening
forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a
combination of the following methods:
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 13
DPR09328

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,
including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings.
2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according
to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage
during curing period.
3.13 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction
traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling
and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges
of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat
holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding
agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in
place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard
portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color.
Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding
with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding
surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Engineer.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 14
DPR09328

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish
and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test
surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs,
rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate
to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and
other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations
by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas
to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written
instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to
match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive
and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling
and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.
B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu.
yd. or fraction thereof.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 15
DPR09328

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests
when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173,
volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of
four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one laboratory-cured specimens at 7
days, two at 28 days, and hold one for testing as required.
a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength
test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting
agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for
both 7-and 28-day tests.
E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct
tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by
other methods as directed by Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 16
DPR09328

Concrete Mix Design
PROJECT NAME:
FNI PROJECT NUMBER:
PROJECT LOCATION:
OWNER:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
MIX NUMBER / CLASS:
A. Mix Design
Cement = lb/yd 3
Fly Ash = lb/yd 3
Other Cementitious Material:
_________________________ = lb/yd 3
Fine Aggregate = lb/yd 3
Coarse Aggregate = lb/yd 3
Water = lb/yd 3
Water Reducing Admixture = oz/yd 3
High Range Water Reducer = oz/yd 3
Air Entraining Admixture = oz/yd 3
Other Admixture:
_________________________ = oz/yd 3
Slump = inches
Gross Weight = lb/yd 3
Air Content = %
Water/Cement Ratio =
B. Materials
Cement
Fly Ash
Other Cementitious
Material:
___________
Fine Aggregate
Coarse Aggregate
Water
Water Reducer
High Range Water
Reducer
Air Entraining
Other Admixture:
___________
SOURCE ASTM TYPE REMARKS
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 17
DPR09328

C. Determination of Average Strength Required (f’ cr )
1. Test Records Available:
A. Summary of Test Records: (Provide supporting documentation.)
Test
Group
No.
No. of Consecutive
Tests
Specified
Strength
(psi)
Standard Deviation
(psi)
Average Standard Deviation:
B. Standard Deviation Modification Factor
(ACI 301, Table 4.2.3.3.a)
________
C. Standard Deviation Used ________
Average Compressive Strength Required
2. Test Records Not Available:
A. Average Compressive Strength Required
(ACI 301, 4.2.3.3.b, if required)
________
________
D. Documentation of Required Average Compressive Strength (Check One)
1. Field Strength Test Record (ACI 301, 4.2.3.4.a) ________
• Complete Attachment A.
2. Trial Mixtures (ACI 301, 4.2.3.4.b) ________
• Complete Attachment B.
I, __________________________ certify that the above information is correct and all gradations,
cement certifications and test results are located at our place of business for review by the Engineer.
NAME: DATE:
TITLE:
COMPANY:
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 18
DPR09328

Attachment A
Documentation of Average Strength – Field Strength Test Record
(ACI 301, 4.2.3.4.a)
A. Summary of test records: (Provide supporting documentation.)
Test Record
No.
No. of Tests
in Record
Duration of
Record
(days)
Water-
Cementitious
Materials
Ratio
Average
Strength
(psi)
B. Interpolation used? ________
• Provide an interpolation calculation or plot of strength versus proportions.
C. Submit the following data for each mix:
1. Brand, type and amount of cement.
2. Brand, type and amount of each admixture.
3. Source of each material used.
4. Amount of water.
5. Proportions of each aggregate material per cubic yard.
6. Gross weight per cubic yard.
7. Measured slump.
8. Measured air content.
9. Results of consecutive strength tests.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 19
DPR09328

Attachment B
Documentation of Average Strength – Trial Mixtures
(ACI 301, 4.2.3.4.b)
A. Summary of test record(s):
Trial
Mix No.
No. of Test
Cylinders
7-day Tests
Strength
(psi)
28-day Tests
No. of Test
Cylinders
Stren
gth
(psi)
Water-
Cementitious
Materials
Ratio
Slump
(in)
Air
Content
(%)
Temprature
(°F)
B. Maximum water-cementitious materials ratio ________
• Provide an interpolation calculation or plot of strength versus water-cementitious
materials ratio.
C. Submit the following data for each mix:
1. Brand, type and amount of cement.
2. Brand, type and amount of each admixture.
3. Amount of water used in trial mixes.
4. Proportions of each aggregate material per cubic yard.
5. Gross weight per cubic yard.
6. Measured slump.
7. Measured air content.
8. Compressive strength developed at 7 days and 28 days, from not less than three
test cylinders cast for each 7 and 28 day test.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 20
DPR09328

05 40 00
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Non-load-bearing wall framing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 09 for ceiling-suspension assemblies.
2. Division 13 for pre-engineered metal building.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.
2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the following:
a. Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height.
3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or
overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors,
or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature
change of 120 deg F.
4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances,
and to accommodate deflection of primary building structure as follows:
a. Upward movement of 3/4” and downward movement of 1 1/4 inch.
1) This is a minimum. Provide additional movement potential as required to accommodate
lateral and vertical movements of pre-engineered metal building
without damage to non-load bearing wall framing. Refer to Division 13 preengineered
metal building spec as required.
B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed
Steel Framing - General Provisions."
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header
Design."
2. Design non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard
for contribution of sheathing materials.
3. Provide bracing between walls, headers at tops of wall, and bracing back to preengineered
metal building as required to support tops of walls.
A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
DPR09328 05 40 00 - 1

B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation
indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging,
splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating
that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive
tests for current products:
1. Steel sheet.
2. Power-actuated anchors.
3. Mechanical fasteners.
4. Vertical deflection clips.
5. Horizontal drift deflection clips
6. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations
of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.
D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating
steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile
strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
F. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions."
1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
DPR09328 05 40 00 - 2

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid
condensation.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
2.02 MATERIALS
1. Allied Studco.
2. AllSteel Products, Inc.
3. California Expanded Metal Products Company.
4. Clark Steel Framing.
5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.
6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC.
7. Custom Stud, Inc.
8. Dale/Incor.
9. Design Shapes in Steel.
10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The).
12. Innovative Steel Systems.
13. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries.
14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc.
15. SCAFCO Corporation.
16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.
17. Steel Construction Systems.
18. Steeler, Inc.
19. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
20. United Metal Products, Inc.
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of
steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content
is not less than 25 percent.
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating
weight as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G90 or equivalent.
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
DPR09328 05 40 00 - 3

2.03 NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated,
punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 33 mils.
2. Flange Width:
1-5/8 inches.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,
with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward
and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment
to stud web.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
b. MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries.
c. SCAFCO Corporation
d. The Steel Network, Inc.
D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched,
with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement,
with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary
structure, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 33 mils.
2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for 1-story structures and 1 inch plus twice the
design gap for other applications.
E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting
of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges
designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure,
and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 43 mils.
b. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for 1-story structures and 1 inch plus twice
the design gap for other applications.
2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 43 mils.
b. Flange Width: Dimension equal to sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1
inch.
F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from
upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.
2.04 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade,
Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
DPR09328 05 40 00 - 4

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated, as follows:
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. Anchor clips.
5. End clips.
6. Foundation clips.
7. Gusset plates.
8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.
9. Hole reinforcing plates.
10. Backer plates.
2.05 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel headless bolts, with encased
end threaded, and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hotdip
process according to ASTM A 153, Class C.
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping
steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and
with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
DPR09328 05 40 00 - 5

3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating
joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening,
according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable
tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
3.00 EXECUTION
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare
tolerance of 1/8 inch.
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing
- General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements
are indicated.
C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.
1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush,
even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated
panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.
D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
DPR09328 05 40 00 - 6

. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying
with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for
track or tension members.
F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity
to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
G. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior
framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that
are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
punched openings.
I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.
Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or
other finishing materials.
3.03 NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space
studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches or as indicated.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support.
1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.
2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.
3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure.
4. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not
more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches
of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width
and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness
matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs
or flanges.
a. Install solid blocking at 96-inch centers or centers indicated on Shop Drawings.
2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched
studs.
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
DPR09328 05 40 00 - 7

3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,
continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable
wall-framing system.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.05 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed
cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
DPR09328 05 40 00 - 8

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: Coordinate with Section 13 34 19, METAL BUILDING
SYSTEMS.
1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.
2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
4. Loose bearing and leveling plates
5. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections.
6. Metal bollards
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete
or built into unit masonry.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,
wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete.
2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
3. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures
by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections,
and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
A. Product Data: For the following:
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items.
2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 1
DPR09328

C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
D. Welding certificates.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified
in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site
in time for installation.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2.02 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 2
DPR09328

2.03 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36 or
ASTM A 283, Grade C or D.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with
MFMA-3.
2.04 FASTENERS
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches or as indicated.
2. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653, structural steel, Grade 33, with
G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.
3. Material: Steel complying with ASTM A 1008, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0966-inch
minimum thickness; hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. Provide
stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy
Group 1.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
G. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
I. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load
equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron
or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized
per ASTM A 153.
J. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 3
DPR09328

the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Anchors: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and
nuts complying with ASTM F 594.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
D. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
topcoat.
1. Available Products:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19.
b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621.
c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313.
d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer.
e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670.
f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.
g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying
with SSPC-Paint 20.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas
on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 4
DPR09328

3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment
and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24
inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
2.08 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.
C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.
2.09 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.10 METAL BOLLARDS
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 5
DPR09328

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those
with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or
masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
3.00 EXECUTION
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established
lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 6
DPR09328

for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood
screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.02 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims
but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed
to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.03 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 7
DPR09328

06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.03 DEFINITIONS
1. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Wood furring and grounds.
3. Plywood backing panels.
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5
inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 1
DPR09328

2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing
agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified
by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated items indicated on Drawings,
and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
2.03 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
4. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 15
percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
4. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.
5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
7. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 2
DPR09328

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Standard or 3 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Standard or 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
4. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA.
5. Northern species, No. 3 Common grade; NLGA.
6. Western woods, Standard or No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that
will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.05 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged
in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.
2.06 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined
by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 3
DPR09328

3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
B. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum
joint arrangement.
E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
F. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
G. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do
not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
3.02 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with
other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection,
inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 4
DPR09328

06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Plastic-laminate cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.03 DEFINITIONS
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, includingcabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate[cabinet hardware and accessories] .
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification
by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets installed
in architectural woodwork.
4. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Plastic laminates.
E. Samples for Verification:
1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface
finish[, with 1 sample applied to core material.
Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 1
DPR09328

F. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: [AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice
performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes,
installation, and other requirements.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements
specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions
of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOODWORK FABRICATORS
A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering interior
architectural woodwork that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 2
DPR09328

2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White oak, rift sawn or cut].
C. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 Medium Density Overlay.
5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1 made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative
laminates by one of the following:
a. Abet Laminati, Inc.
b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc.
c. Formica Corporation.
d. Lamin-Art, Inc.
e. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
f. Panolam Industries International Incorporated.
g. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
h. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
i.

1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;
zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
3. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.
2.05 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior
woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm)
Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3
mm).
E. Complete fabrication, including assembly finishing and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 4
DPR09328

1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install
dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed
after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies
against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling
for shipment.
F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
G. .
2.06 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A. Grade: Custom.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Edges: Grade HGS .
D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS .
2. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: [PVC tape, 0.018-inch (0.460-mm) minimum thickness,
matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish] Drawer Sides and Backs: Solidhardwood
lumber].
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade BKL.
F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.
2. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories:
a. Solid colors, matte finish.
G. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
2.07 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Grade: Custom.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 5
DPR09328

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
E. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood.
F. Core Material at Sinks: exterior-grade plywood.
G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop
substrate.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400
mm).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure
with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.
Use fine finishing nailsfor exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 6
DPR09328

2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.]
3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 7
DPR09328

06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling[ and trim accessories].
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring for installing plastic paneling.
2. Section 102600 "Wall and Door Protection" for corner guards installed over plastic paneling.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic paneling.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature
and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with
ASTM D 5319.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kemlite Fire-
Glasbord (FX) or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Kemlite Company Inc.
Plastic Paneling
DPR09328
06 64 00 - 1

. Marlite.
c. Nudo Products, Inc.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm).
3. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture].
4. Color: White.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and
cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as
needed to conceal edges.
1. Color: White.
2. Color: White.
B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into
grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate.
D. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.
1. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department
of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended
by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
1. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department
of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even
surface for panel installation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt,
and dust.
C. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according
to manufacturer's written recommendations.
D. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of
walls not less than half the width of full panels.
Plastic Paneling
DPR09328
06 64 00 - 2

1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation.
2. Locate panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that
fasteners are accurately aligned.
1. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes.
2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners.
D. Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints.
E. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails. Do not fasten through panels.
F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner
trim in a bead of sealant.
G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
H. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings,
and fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended
by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.
END OF SECTION
Plastic Paneling
DPR09328
06 64 00 - 3

07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the [applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule
at the end of Part 3.
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces:
2. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
a. Joints between metal panels.
b. Joints between different materials listed above.
c. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, and louvers.
d. Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces]
e. Other joints as indicated.
3. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
4. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
5. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
6. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors] and .
7. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
8. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistancerated
construction.
2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements,
walkways, and curbing.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and waterresistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 1
DPR09328

C. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods
resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in
"Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility
and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
E. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed
by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers,
for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific
joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint
sealants to joint substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than four pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective
measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility
with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
3. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
a. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
erected.
5. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 2
DPR09328

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend
cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for
opposite side.
6. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion
is obtained.
7. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive
failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements,
will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.07 WARRANTY
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C)
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural
settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 3
DPR09328

2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining
to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Multicomponent Nonsag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Products:
2. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 H.P.
3. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).
4. Class: 50.
5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
7. Use O Joint Substrates: galvanized steel.
D. Single-Component Pourable Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Products:
2. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.
a. Pecora Corporation; 300 Pavement Sealant (Self Leveling).
b. Dow Corning Corporation; SL Parking Structure Sealant.
3. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable).
4. Class: 100/50.
5. Uses Related to Exposure: NT and T (traffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M A and O, as applicable to joint substrates indicated.
7. Use O Joint Substrates: Galvanized steel.
E. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic).
d. GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000.
e. Pecora Corporation; 864.
f. Pecora Corporation; 890.
g. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641.
h. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Omniseal.
i. Tremco; Spectrem 3.
j.

o. Pecora Corporation; 865.
p. Pecora Corporation; 895.
q. Pecora Corporation; 898.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 100/50.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
6. Use O Joint Substrates:[galvanized steel.
F. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Products:
2. Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
3. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000.
4. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC.
5. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-631.
6. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus.
7. Tremco; Proglaze SG.
8. Tremco; Spectrem 2.
9. Tremco; Tremsil 600.
10. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
11. Class: 25.
12. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
13. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
14. Use O Joint Substrates: galvanized steel.
G. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Products:
2. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.
a. Tremco; Dymeric 511.
b. Tremco; Vulkem 922.
3. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
4. Class: 50.
5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) and T (traffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
7. Use O Joint Substrates: galvanized steel.
H. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Products:
2. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 500.
a. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 R Type II (Gun Grade).
b. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-270.
c. Tremco; Dymeric.
3. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 5
DPR09328

4. Class: 25.
5. Additional Movement Capability: 40 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in
compression for a total of 65 percent movement.
6. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
7. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, [G, ]A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
8. Use O Joint Substrates: Galvanized steel.
I. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Products:
2. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 1a.
a. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra.
b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 1.
c. Tremco; Vulkem 116.
3. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
4. Class: 25.
5. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
7. Use O Joint Substrates: galvanized steel.
J. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant
1. Products:
2. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 900.
a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 915.
b. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 916 Textured.
c. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 2639.
d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
e. Polymeric Systems Inc.; Flexiprene 1000.
f. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-901.
g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7100.
h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7108.
i. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7110.
j. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 15LM.
k. Tremco; DyMonic.
l. Tremco; Vulkem 921.
m. Tremco; Vulkem 931.
3. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
4. Class: 50.
5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
7. Use O Joint Substrates: galvanized steel.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 6
DPR09328

2.04 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type [C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin)] [O (open-cell material)] [B (bicellular material with a surface skin)][ or any of the preceding
types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated],
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance:
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces
at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive
tape where applicable.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealantsubstrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of
staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated
to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants,
oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 7
DPR09328

after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed
air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
3. Concrete.
4. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
5. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous
joint substrates include the following:
6. Metal.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer,
based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion
of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 8
DPR09328

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure
5C in ASTM C 1193.
6. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:
2. Perform 4 tests for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.
3. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
4. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this
by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure
for opposite side.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures
used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and
that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements.
Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants
are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection,
damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint
sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original
work.
3.07 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic construction joints in
cast-in-place concrete. Colors are to match the material being sealed.
1. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag neutral-curing silicone sealant, Multicomponent
nonsag immersible urethane sealant or Single-component nonsag urethane sealant.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed above.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral- and basic-curing silicone sealant,Singlecomponent
nonsag urethane sealant.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior perimeter joints between metal panels and frames of
doorsand louvers.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 9
DPR09328

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral- and basic-curing silicone sealant,Multicomponent
nonsag urethane sealant or Single-component nonsag urethane
sealant.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces
of exterior walls.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant or Multicomponent nonsag
urethane sealant or.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral- and basic-curing silicone sealant or Multicomponent
nonsag urethane sealant.
2. .
F. Joint-Sealant Application Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior
doors and windows.
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant.
END OF SECTION
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 10
DPR09328

08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Related Sections:
1.03 DEFINITIONS
1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
2. Division 09 Sections Exterior Paintingand"Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal
doors and frames.
.
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
C. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-
HMMA 861.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision
of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
DPR09328
08 11 13 - 1

D. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding
limitations of labeled assemblies.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at
positive pressure according to NFPA 252orUL 10C.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in
a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high
wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Kewanee Corporation (The).
4. Mesker Door Inc.
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
DPR09328
08 11 13 - 2

2.02 MATERIALS
5. Security Metal Products Corp.
6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
7. Windsor Republic Doors.
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40 (ZF120) metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation;
mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices
for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.03 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled metallic-coated sheet steeel. Provide
doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level
and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
DPR09328
08 11 13 - 3

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates
from same material as door face sheets.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled
steel sheet.
2.04 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheetexcept where frame is to acomidate a
hollow metal door use metallic-coated sheet steel.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet.
4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
5. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
6. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.
7. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates
from same material as frames.
2.05 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch (1.0 mm) thick.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm)
thick, and as follows:
2.06 FABRICATION
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing
not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-
HMMA 861.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19
mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
DPR09328
08 11 13 - 4

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610
mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and mounted
in metal-stud partitions.
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either coldor
hot-rolled steel sheet.
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the
Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted
door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division
26 Sections.
2.07 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying
with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer
for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
DPR09328
08 11 13 - 5

3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before
frame installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on
exposed faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel
to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular
line from head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations,
field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress,
and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
DPR09328
08 11 13 - 6

f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing
antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion
anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch
(19 mm).
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection.
Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective
work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
END OF SECTION
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
DPR09328
08 11 13 - 7

08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
B. Related Sections:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting"] for field finishing doors.
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction
and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of
door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking;
and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200
by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish,
provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in
the finished work.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and wood paneling from single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating
that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 1
DPR09328

C. Forest Certification: Provide doors made with not less than 70 percent of wood products all
wood products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to
comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing atas close to
neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,
provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction
requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder
of the construction period.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-
by-2134-mm) section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
(0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Buell Door Company Inc.
2. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Ipik Door Company.
4. VT Industries Inc.
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 2
DPR09328

2.02 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products
that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extra Heavy Duty: Meeting rooms public toilets exits, stairs and kitchen.
3. Standard Duty: Closets .
C. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 or
M-2, except for density.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:If retaining subparagraph
and second option above, retain first three subparagraphs below for blocking
required.
a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.
b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have
kick, mop, or armor plates.
c. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide
fire-protection rating indicated.
1. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent
seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2. Provide formed-steel edges and astragals.
a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel.
2.03 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.
2. Species: Select white maple.
3. Cut: Rotary cut.
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Pleasing match.
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridordoor
faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet (3 m) or more.
8. Exposed Vertical[ and Top] Edges: Same species as faces.
9. Core: Particleboard.
10. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
.
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 3
DPR09328

2.04 FABRICATION
A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for
pairs of fire-rated doors.
2.05 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Finish doors at factory.
C. Transparent Finish:
3.00 EXECUTION
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system.
3. Staining: As indicated..
4. Effect: Open-grain finish.
5. Sheen: Satin.
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted
for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and
mortises after fitting and machining.
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 4
DPR09328

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering
unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and
rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence
of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 5
DPR09328

08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of manually operated overhead coiling doors:
1. Insulated service doors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.03 DEFINITIONS
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying.
A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position
to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation
of door components:
1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward
and outward.
2. Impact Test for Flying Debris: Comply with ASTM E 1996, tested according to
ASTM E 1886.
a. Level of Protection: Basic Protection.
b. Wind Zone One110 mph (176 km/h), pressure test to 1/2 and 1-1/2 x design pressure
(positive and negative).
B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide] 20,000 cycles.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the
following:
1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available
for units with factory-applied finishes.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 1
DPR09328

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Atlas Door; Div. of Clopay Building Products Company, Inc.
2. Cookson Company.
3. Cornell Iron Works Inc.
4. Overhead Door Corp.
5. Raynor.
2.02 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand
wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by
door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:
1. Aluminum Door Curtain Slats: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) or ASTM B 221
(ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for
type of use and finish indicated.
a. Aluminum Extrusion Thickness: Not less than 0.051 inch (1.30 mm).
b. Flat profile slats.
2. Insulation: Fill slat with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane-foam-type
thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped
indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation
completely within metal slat faces.
3. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat.
B. Endlocks and Windlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication,
secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on
not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral
movement.
C. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by
1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick; galvanized, stainless-steel, or aluminum extrusions to suit
type of curtain slats.
D. Curtain Jamb Guides for Service Doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles or
channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to
operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch- (5-
mm-) thick galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and
Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 2
DPR09328

ASTM A 123/A 123M. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on
guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.
2.03 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism
at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce
top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods
and provide fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face.
Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.
1. Fabricate hoods for aluminum doors, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer
and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum
thickness, complying with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Shape: Round.
B. Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping
gaskets fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head,
use 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.
1. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.
2. In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick
seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.
C. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized
steel lifting handles on each side of door.
D. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by
padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
2.04 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring
mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with
barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating
members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or
seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain
without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5
mm/m) of span under full load.
C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs.
Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from
outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.
D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring
ends and carry torsional load.
E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or
cold-rolled steel plate.
2.05 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. Provide manual chain-hoist operators unless electric door operators are indicated.
Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 3
DPR09328

B. Chain-Hoist Operator: Provide manual chain-hoist operator consisting of endless steel hand
chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 35-lbf (155-N)
force for door operation. Provide alloy steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator
guide.
2.06 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components
are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed
to minimize contrast.
2.07 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder-coat finish consisting of primer and
topcoat according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment,
application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion
and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
3.03 STARTUP SERVICES
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.
END OF SECTION
Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 4
DPR09328

08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Commercial door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for astragals and for door silencers
provided as part of hollow-metal frames.
2. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for door hardware, [including] cylinders.
A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions
of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include
final hardware and keying schedule.
C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
D. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures
and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related
work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence
and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and
date each page.
b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as
in the Contract Documents.
c. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and
frame.
2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware
item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.
3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including
name and manufacturer.
4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
7) Mounting locations for door hardware.
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 1

8) Door and frame sizes and materials.
d. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential Product
Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction
schedule. Submit the final door hardware sets after Samples, Product Data, coordination
with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information
has been completed and accepted.
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant,
detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram
and index each key set to unique door designations.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.
1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a
qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to
consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.
3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI
as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services
for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to
that indicated for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Are acceptable.
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Test Pressure: [Test at atmospheric pressure] [After 5 minutes into the test, neutral
pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1016 mm) or less above the
sill].
E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division
01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner Contractor,
and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware
Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing
door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and
plans for future expansion.
2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
3. Requirements for key control system.
4. Address for delivery of keys.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered
to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware
sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each
item or package.
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 2

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified
to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply
with indicated requirements.
B. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing
conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and
to provide for proper operation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering
and use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:
a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance
by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance,
repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting
as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as
those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section
and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products
equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation,
and interface with other building control systems indicated.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 3

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
2.02 HINGES, GENERAL
A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches (1524 mm).
2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches (1549 to 2286 mm).
3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches (2311 to 3048 mm).
4. For doors with heights more than 120 inches (3048 mm), provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge
for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than 120 inches (3048 mm).
B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves)
into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges.
2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges.
3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges.
D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
2. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
E. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
2.03 HINGES
1. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.Screws: Phillips flathead;
machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors. Finish screw heads to
match surface of hinges.
A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
2. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
3. Hager Companies (HAG).
4. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 4

2.04 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,
comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).
B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not
require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool,
or special knowledge for operation.
C. Lock Trim:
1. Levers: Cast.
2. Escutcheons (Roses): Cast.
3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
D. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows:
1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
2. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
3. Strikes for Interconnected Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.12.
4. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
2.05 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply
with the following:
1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.
B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts
2.06 DOOR BOLTS
1. Manufacturers:
a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. (ALH).
b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).
c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).
d. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS).
e. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
f. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).
g. Folger Adam Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (FAS).
h. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL).
i. Marks USA (MKS).
j. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ).
k. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).
l. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).
m. Security Door Controls (SDC).
n. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).
A. Manual Flush Bolts designed for mortising into door edge.
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 5

2.07 EXIT DEVICES
1. Manufacturers:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).
b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).
c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO).
d. Door Controls International (DCI).
e. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).
f. Hager Companies (HAG).
g. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).
i. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
j. Trimco (TBM).
A. Exit Devices:
B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices
are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural
& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).
C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require
more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool,
or special knowledge for operation.
D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
2.08 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. High-Security Lock Cylinders:
1. Key Control Level
2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.
3. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other
manufacturers' cylinders.
4. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with core
manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.
B. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:
1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent
cores.
a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.
b. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
C. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
D. Manufacturers:
1. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ABL).
2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 6

2.09 KEYING
3. ASSA, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ASA).
4. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS).
5. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).
6. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL).
7. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MED).
8. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).
9. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).
10. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix
A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:
1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
B. Keys: Nickel silver.
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include
the following notation:
a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
b. Master Keys: Five.
2.10 OPERATING TRIM
A. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.
B. Manufacturers:
2.11 CLOSERS
1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).
2. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO).
3. Forms + Surfaces (FS).
4. Hager Companies (HAG).
5. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
6. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).
7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
8. Trimco (TBM).
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices
are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural
& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.
b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch.
c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 7

B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require
more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open
door to minimum required width.
C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer
device with fire alarm system.
D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations
for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated
frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements
for opening force.
E. Surface Closers: Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of
door, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).
b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).
c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America
(DAH).
d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR).
e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).
f. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC).
g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).
h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).
i. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).
2.12 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Stops and Bumpers:
1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated.
Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not
appropriate, provide overhead holders.
B. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum
diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH).
2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
3. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).
4. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
5. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO).
6. Door Controls International (DCI).
7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH).
8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR).
9. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).
10. Hager Companies (HAG).
11. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES).
12. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
13. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 8

14. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).
15. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
16. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).
17. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
18. Trimco (TBM).
2.13 DOOR GASKETING
A. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,
light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive
fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
B. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for
gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.
C. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are
easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
D. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
E. Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies (HAG).
2. M-D Building Products, Inc. (MD).
3. National Guard Products (NGP).
4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).
5. Reese Enterprises (RE).
6. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL).
7. Zero International (ZRO).
8.

2.15 FABRICATION
6. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).
7. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL).
8. Zero International (ZRO).
9.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections
before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.
1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to
ANSI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to
be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep
period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds
to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the
door.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion,
Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting
operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door
hardware, and electrified door hardware.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 11

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.06 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
Door Hardware Set No.1
Door 101A
1 1/2 pair Hinges Hager BB1191 4-1/2x4-1/2” 630
1 each Lockset Best 35H-7-LF-14-M 630
1 each Weatherstripping Pemko S88
1 each Threshold Pemko 171A x 4"
1 each Floorstop Glynn Johnson FB13 US32D
1 each Door Bottom Pemko 216AV
1 each Drip Cap NGP 16A
1 each Exit Device Von Duprin 99NL 630
1 each Closer LCN 4041 652
Door Hardware Set No.2
Door 103B
2 pair Hinges Hager BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2" 630
1 each Lockset Best 35H-7-E-14-M 630
2 each Floor Stop Glynn Johnson GJ FB13 US32D
8 each Silencer Glynn Johnson GJ 64
1 each
1 each
Closer
Threshold
LCN
Pemko
4041
171Ax4”
1 each Exit Device Von Duprin 99NL 630
Door Hardware Set No.3
Door 112A
1 each Lockset Best 35H-7-E-14-M
1 each Threshold Pemko 171A x 4”
4 pair Hinges Hager BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2" 630
2 each Floor Stop Glynn Johnson FB13 US32D
6 each Silencer Glynn Johnson Z1 (64)
1 each Flush bolt Glynn Johnson GJ FB6
Door Hardware Set No.4
Door 113A, 113B, 104B
1 1/2 pair Hinges Hager BB1191 4-1/2x4-1/2” 630
1 each Exit Device Von Duprin 99NL 630
1 each Closer LCN 4041 652
1 each Weatherstripping Pemko S88
1 each Threshold Pemko 171A x 4"
1 each Floorstop Glynn Johnson FB13 US32D
1 each Door Bottom Pemko 216AV
1 each Drip Cap NGP 16A
Door Hardware Set No.5
Door 115A
1 each Lockset Best 35H-7-LF-14-M
1 1/2 pair Hinges Hager BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2" 630
1 each Exit Device Von Duprin 99NL 630
3 each Floor Stop Glynn Johnson FB13 US32D
1 each Closer LCN 4041 652
1 each Threshold Pemko 171A x 4"
1 each Weatherstripping Pemko S88
1 each DoorBottom Pemko 216AV
652
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 12

1 each Drip Cap NGP 16A
Door Hardware Set No.6
Door 102A
1 each Threshold Pemko 171A x 4”
3 each Silencer Glynn Johnson 21(64)
2 pair Hinges Hager BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2" 630
1 each Lockset Best 35H-7-LF-14-M 630
2 each Floor Stop Glynn Johnson GJ FB13 US32D
Door Hardware Set No.7
Door 115B
2 pair Hinges Hager BB1191 4-1/2 x 41/2" 630
1 each Exit Device Von Duprin 99NL 630
1 each Closer LCN 4041 652
1 each Threshold Pemko 171A x 4"
1 each Door Bottom Pemko 216AV
3 each Silencer Glynn Johnson Z1 (64)
1 each Lockset Best 35H-7-E-14-M 630
Door Hardware Set No.8
Door 106A, 106B, 107A, 107B, 108A
2 pair Hinges Hager BB1191 4-1/2 x 41/2" 630
1 each Threshold Pemko 171A x 4"
3 each Silencer Glynn Johnson Z1 (64)
1 each Lockset Best 35H-7-E-14-M 630
1 each Floorstop Glynn Johnson FB13 US32D
Door Hardware Set No.9
Door 109A
2 pair Hinges Hager BB1191 4-1/2 x 41/2" 630
1 each Threshold Pemko 171A x 4"
3 each Silencer Glynn Johnson Z1 (64)
1 each Lockset Best 35H-7-E-14-M 630
1 each Closer LCN 4041 652
END OF SECTION
Door Hardware
DPR09328
08 71 00 - 13

08 90 00 LOUVERS AND VENTS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and wind loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (957 Pa), acting inward or
outward, without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused
by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from a
temperature change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces, by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1. Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
B. Samples: For each type of finish.
C. Product test reports.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Louvers:
a. Airline Products Co.
b. Airolite Company (The).
c. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. Greenheck.
e. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005.
C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel.
Louvers and Vents 08 90 00 - 1
DPR09328

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate frames to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication
and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
B. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners,
or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view.
2.04 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Drainable-Blade Louver:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Ruskin; extruded aluminum stationary louver; ESD-403 or a
comparable product.
2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (1.5 mm) for blades and
0.080 inch (2.0 mm) for frames.
3. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1.2-m-) wide by 48-
inch- (1.2-m-) high louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm (5.1 m/s).
c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg (37-Pa) static pressure drop at 950-
fpm (4.8-m/s) free-area velocity.
4. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.05 COMBINATION, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Dual-Blade, Drainable-Blade, Combination Louver: Fixed drainable blades and adjustable
plain blades combined in single frame.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Ruskin; extruded aluminum combination louver; ELC6375D or
a comparable product.
2. Louver Depth: 6 inches (150 mm)
3. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than 7.0 sq. ft. (0.65 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1.2-m-) wide by 48-
inch- (1.2-m-) high louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm (5.1 m/s).
c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg (25-Pa) static pressure drop at 900-
fpm (4.6-m/s) free-area velocity.
d. Air Leakage: Not more than 0.45 cfm per sq. ft. of louver gross area at a differential
static pressure of 0.15-inch wg (37 Pa) with adjustable louver blades closed.
4. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Electrical Operators:
1. Electrical operators shall have two (2) positions: power open, spring close, operating on a
120 volt control circuit.
2. Electrical operators shall be surface mounted near the louver with connecting rods and
linkage exposed to the inside space.
2.06 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at interior face of each exterior louver.
Louvers and Vents 08 90 00 - 2
DPR09328

B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which
screens are attached.
C. Louver Screening:
1. Bird Screening: Stainless steel, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh, 0.047-inch (1.19-
mm) wire.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Aluminum, High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat thermocured system with
fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by
weight; complying with AAMA 2605.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that
cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire
unit or provide new units.
E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by
applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete,
masonry, or dissimilar metals.
END OF SECTION
Louvers and Vents 08 90 00 - 3
DPR09328

09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing
and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and
roof trusses.
2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation.
3. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed
with non-load-bearing steel framing.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate
non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that im-
Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 1
DPR09328

posed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent
testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-
mm) diameter.
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of
0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-
inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main
beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System.
c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
2.03 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into
top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of
studs to provide lateral bracing.
2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-)
deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and
outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness
not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.
2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 2
DPR09328

C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract
with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak [attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip].
b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
c.

structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance
of time needed for coordination and construction.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
3.04 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not
less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other
assembly components indicated.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system
members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes
or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise
fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to
each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 4
DPR09328

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
(3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely
between parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.05 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated
to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions
above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings
to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated.
D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION
Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 5
DPR09328

09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Tile backing panels.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel framing that
supports gypsum board.
2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum
board.
3. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
4. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate
gypsum board.
5. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension
systems that support gypsum board.
6. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials
and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by
an independent testing agency.
B. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft.
(9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials
and execution.
1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels
flat to prevent sagging.
Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 1
DPR09328

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's
written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
2.01 PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.02 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. BPB America Inc.
c. G-P Gypsum.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.
e. National Gypsum Company.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. Temple.
h. USG Corporation.
i.

D. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
d.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
2.05 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends
with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into
place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do
not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in
area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 4
DPR09328

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments,
except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations,
and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction.
Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including
floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant
at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919
and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off
sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical
ceilings.
3.03 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Regular Type: [Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated].
2. Type X: [Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly] [Vertical surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated] Type C: [As indicated on Drawings] [Where required for specific fireresistance-rated
assembly indicated].
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels [vertically (parallel to framing)] [ unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
panels.
2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.04 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at [showers, tubs, and where indicated] [locations
indicated to receive plastic paneling].
B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce
a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.05 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to
ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect].
Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 5
DPR09328

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners[, unless otherwise indicated].
2. LC-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges] .
3. L-Bead: Use [where indicated] .
D. .
3.06 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM
C 840:
1. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile Level 3 is suitable for surfaces receiving medium-
or heavy-textured finishes before painting or heavy wallcoverings where lighting
conditions are not critical.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated Primer
and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.07 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce
a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application
patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture
finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite
these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings
and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction,
and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 6
DPR09328

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 7
DPR09328

09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test methods specified.
B. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where
they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 1
DPR 09328

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern
designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations,
provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that
comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical
performance, edge detail, and size.
2.03 MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A. Products:
1. Armstrong “Cortega” 3/4” thick square edge, 2’ x 4’, white ceiling panel
2.04 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply
with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide
manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification
for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 2
DPR 09328

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2.05 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with
prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.
3.00 EXECUTION
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical
panel ceilings.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths
at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and
comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636and seismic requirements
indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems
Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum
of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye
Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 3
DPR 09328

screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches
(200 mm) from ends of each member.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing
wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system
to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and
connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
3.04 CLEANING
1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated
assembly.
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 4
DPR 09328

09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient molding accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size
Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture,
and pattern required.
D. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) , in spaces to receive resilient
products during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 13 - 1
DPR09328

3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m)
or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
2.01 RESILIENT BASE>
A. Resilient Base:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries.
b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
c. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
d. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
e. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.
f. Flexco, Inc.
g. Johnsonite.
h. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
i. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.
j. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
k. PRF USA, Inc.
l. Roppe Corporation, USA.
m. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1. Material Requirement: [Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber,
thermoplastic)].
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered).
3. Style: Cove (base with toe).
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm) and 6 inches (152 mm).
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length] .
F. Outside Corners: Job formed.
Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 13 - 2
DPR09328

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.
H. Finish: Satin].
I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors].
J. Material: Rubber.
K. Profile and Dimensions: As selected by Architect.
L. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.02 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications
indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
products.
B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to
ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 13 - 3
DPR09328

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation
only after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000
sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level
measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound
and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are
to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
2. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.03 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and
other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing
discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 13 - 4
DPR09328

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 13 - 5
DPR09328

09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
B. Related Sections:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips,
and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways,
enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches
(230 mm) long, of each color required.
E. Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each flooring product,
color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (150-
by-230-mm)Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
F. Product Schedule: For floor tile.[ Use same designations indicated on Drawings.]
G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
H. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method
indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
manufacturer for installation techniques required.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 19 - 1
DPR09328

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories.
a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed
by Architect.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than [70 deg F (21 deg C)] or more than [95 deg F (35 deg C)] , in spaces to receive floor
tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 25 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and
pattern of floor tile installed.
2.02 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following]:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Standard Excelon Imperial Texture.
2. Congoleum Corporation;Choices.
3. Mannington Mills, Inc.; Designer Essentials.
B. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm)Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 19 - 2
DPR09328

C. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors..
2.03 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications
indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate
conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams.
a. Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to contrast with floor
tile] [Match floor tile] .
2. Chemical-Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams.
a. Use chemical-bonding compound that has a VOC content of [350] [510] g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 19 - 3
DPR09328

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation
only after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000
sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.
C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended
by access flooring manufacturer.
D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound
and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
E. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.03 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets,
so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tilesat a 45-degree angle with room axis.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor
tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining
marking device.
G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,
and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between
pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates
that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 19 - 4
DPR09328

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I. Seamless Installation:
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding
bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and
finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.
2. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to permanently
fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare seams and apply compound
to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on
floor covering surfaces.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces
before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coat(s)
E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 19 - 5
DPR09328

09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
B. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1. Steel.
2. Galvanized metal.
3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
C. Related Sections include the following:
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this
Section.
2. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.
3. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this
Section.
4. Division 09 painting Sections for special-use coatings.
5. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on interior substrates.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products
List."
Exterior Painting
DPR09328
09 91 13 - 1

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. ChemRex.
3. Coronado Paint.
4. ICI Paints.
5. Kelly-Moore Paints.
6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
7. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
2.02 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers
of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.03 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3.
B. Bonding Primer (Water Based): MPI #17.
C. Bonding Primer (Solvent Based): MPI #69.
D. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
system indicated.
Exterior Painting
DPR09328
09 91 13 - 2

2.04 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
C. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.
D. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.
E. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.
2.05 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6.
B. Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer: MPI #5.
C. Exterior Oil Wood Primer: MPI #7.
2.06 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS
A. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1).
B. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).
C. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60
deg).
2.07 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS
A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Flat): MPI #8 (Gloss Level 1).
B. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5).
C. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Gloss): MPI #9 (Gloss Level 6).
2.08 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).
B. Quick-Drying Enamel (High Gloss): MPI #96 (Gloss Level 7).
2.09 ALUMINUM PAINT
A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.
2.10 FLOOR COATINGS
A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.
B. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Solvent Based): MPI #104.
Exterior Painting
DPR09328
09 91 13 - 3

3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes
and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
3.02 PREPARATION
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces
that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
F. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.
G. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Exterior Painting
DPR09328
09 91 13 - 4

3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation,
paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines
and color breaks.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work
of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect,
and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
3.05 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:
1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI EXT 5.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).
B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A.
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
2. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3H.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
Exterior Painting
DPR09328
09 91 13 - 5

C. Aluminum Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.4H.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.4F.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss).
END OF SECTION
Exterior Painting
DPR09328
09 91 13 - 6

09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
1.00 0BGENERAL
1.01 3BRELATED DOCUMENTS
A. 2BDrawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Refer to Section 09 96
00, PROTECTIVE COATINGS to determine painting requirements for plant equipment and
other structures.
1.02 4BSUMMARY
A. 23BThis Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1. 81BConcrete.
2. 82BSteel.
3. 83BGalvanized metal.
4. 84BAluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
5. 85BWood.
6. 86BGypsum board.
B. 24BRelated Sections include the following:
1.03 5BSUBMITTALS
1. 87BDivision 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this
Section.
2. 8BDivision 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.
3. 89BDivision 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this
Section.
4. 90BDivision 09 painting Sections for special-use coatings.
5. 91BDivision 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on exterior substrates.
A. 25BProduct Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. 26BSamples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
C. 27BSamples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
1. 92BSubmit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
2. 93BStep coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. 94BLabel each coat of each Sample.
4. 95BLabel each Sample for location and application area.
D. 28BProduct List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. 96BCross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 1
DPR09328

2. 97BPrintout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.04 6BQUALITY ASSURANCE
A. 29BMPI Standards:
1. 98BProducts: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products
List."
2. 9BPreparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
1.05 7BDELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. 30BStore materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1. 10BMaintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. 101BRemove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.06 8BPROJECT CONDITIONS
A. 31BApply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. 32BDo
not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
2.00 1BPRODUCTS
2.01 9BMANUFACTURERS
A. 3BManufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. 102Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. 103BChemRex.
3. 104BCoronado Paint.
4. 105BICI Paints.
5. 106BKelly-Moore Paints.
6. 107BPPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
7. 108BSherwin-Williams Company (The).
2.02 10BPAINT, GENERAL
A. 34BMaterial Compatibility:
1. 109BSystems could fail if paints used for individual coats are incompatible. MPI's paint systems
match primers and topcoats and take compatibility into consideration.
2. 10BProvide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
3. 1BFor each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers
of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 2
DPR09328

B. 35BChemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints
and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied
in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. 12BAromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
2. 13BRestricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. 142BAcrolein.
b. 143BAcrylonitrile.
c. 14BAntimony.
d. 145Benzene.
e. 146Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. 147BCadmium.
g. 148BDi (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. 149BDi-n-butyl phthalate.
i. 150BDi-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 151B1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. 152BDiethyl phthalate.
l. 153BDimethyl phthalate.
m. 154BEthylbenzene.
n. 15BFormaldehyde.
o. 156BHexavalent chromium.
p. 157BIsophorone.
q. 158BLead.
r. 159BMercury.
s. 160BMethyl ethyl ketone.
t. 161BMethyl isobutyl ketone.
u. 162BMethylene chloride.
v. 163BNaphthalene.
w. 164BToluene (methylbenzene).
x. 165B1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. 16BVinyl chloride.
C. 36BColors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.03 1BPRIMERS/SEALERS
A. 37BInterior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
B. 38BInterior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.
2.04 12BMETAL PRIMERS
A. 39BAlkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
B. 40BQuick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 3
DPR09328

C. 41BCementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.
1. 14BVOC Content: E Range of E1.
D. 42BWaterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.
E. 43BQuick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.
2.05 13BWOOD PRIMERS
A. 4BInterior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
2.06 14BLATEX PAINTS
A. 45BInterior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).
B. 46BInterior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).
C. 47BInterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).
2.07 15BALUMINUM PAINT
A. 48BAluminum Paint: MPI #1.
2.08 16BFLOOR COATINGS
A. 49BInterior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.
B. 50BInterior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Solvent Based): MPI #104.
3.00 2BEXECUTION
3.01 17BEXAMINATION
A. 51BExamine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. 52BMaximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. 15BConcrete: 12 percent.
2. 16BMasonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. 17BWood: 15 percent.
4. 18BGypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. 19BPlaster: 12 percent.
C. 53BVerify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes
and primers.
D. 54Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. 120Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 4
DPR09328

3.02 18BPREPARATION
A. 5BComply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. 56BRemove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. 121BAfter completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. 12BDo not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. 57BClean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. 123BRemove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D. 58BConcrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. 59BClay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
F. 60BConcrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
G. 61BGalvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces
that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
H. 62BAluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.
I. 63BWood Substrates:
1. 124BScrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. 125BSand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. 126BPrime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. 127BAfter priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
J. 64BGypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
K. 65BCotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material
that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.03 19BAPPLICATION
A. 6BApply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. 128BUse
applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 5
DPR09328

2. 129BPaint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. 130BPaint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. 67BTint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. 68BIf
undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. 69BApply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines
and color breaks.
E. 70BPainting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied
spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. 131BMechanical Work:
a. 167BUninsulated metal piping.
b. 168BUninsulated plastic piping.
c. 169BPipe hangers and supports.
d. 170BTanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
e. 171BVisible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
f. 172BDuct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or
other paintable jacket material.
g. 173BMechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
2. 132BElectrical Work:
a. 174BSwitchgear.
b. 175BPanelboards.
c. 176BElectrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
3.04 20BCLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. 71BAt
end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
B. 72BAfter completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. 73BProtect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work
of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect,
and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. 74BAt
completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 6
DPR09328

3.05 21BINTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. 75BConcrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. 13BClear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2F.
a. 17BFirst Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (solvent based).
b. 178BTopcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (solvent based).
2. 134BWater-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
a. 179BFirst Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).
b. 180BTopcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).
B. 76BSteel Substrates:
1. 135BQuick-Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A.
a. 181BPrime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. 182BIntermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.
c. 183BTopcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).
C. 7BGalvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. 136BWater-Based Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.3H.
a. 184BPrime Coat: Waterborne dry fall.
b. 185BTopcoat: Waterborne dry fall.
2. 137BAluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.3G.
a. 186BPrime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. 187BIntermediate Coat: Aluminum paint.
c. 18BTopcoat: Aluminum paint.
D. 78BAluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. 138BLatex System: MPI INT 5.4H.
a. 189BPrime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. 190BIntermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. 191BTopcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).
E. 79BDressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork.
1. 139BLatex System: MPI INT 6.3T.
a. 192BPrime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. 193BIntermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. 194BTopcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).
2. 140BLatex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.3U.
F. 80BGypsum Board Substrates:
1. 141BLatex System: MPI INT 9.2A.
a. 195BPrime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. 196BIntermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. 197BTopcoat: Interior latex (eggshell).
END OF SECTION
Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 7
DPR09328

09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field application of high-performance coating
systems to items and surfaces scheduled.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.03 DEFINITIONS
1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for general field painting.
A. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
B. Gloss ranges used in this Section include the following:
1. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
2. High gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at
a 60-degree meter.
C. Environments: The following terms are used in Part 2 of this Section to distinguish between
different corrosive exposures:
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. "Severe environments" are highly corrosive industrial atmospheres with sustained exposure
to high humidity and condensation and with frequent cleaning using strong chemicals.
Environments with heavy concentrations of strong chemical fumes and frequent
splashing and spilling of harsh chemical products are severe environments.
2. "Moderate environments" are corrosive industrial atmospheres with intermittent exposure
to high humidity and condensation, occasional mold and mildew development, and regular
cleaning with strong chemicals. Environments with exposure to heavy concentrations
of chemical fumes and occasional splashing and spilling of chemical products are moderate
environments.
3. "Mild environments" are industrial atmospheres with normal exposure to moderate humidity
and condensation, occasional mold and mildew development, and infrequent
cleaning with strong chemicals. Environments with low levels of mild chemical fumes and
occasional splashing and spilling of chemical products are mild environments. Normal
outdoor weathering is also considered a mild environment.
A. Product Data: For each coating system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material
by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
High-Performance Coatings 09 96 00 - 1
DPR09328

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each material specified.
B. Certification by manufacturer that products supplied comply with requirements indicated that
limit the amount of VOCs in coating products.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.
Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required
sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2. List of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location
and application.
3. Submit samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture:
a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm-) square samples for each color and finish.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed highperformance
coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for
Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from
the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of
coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate
finish of approved sample Submittals.
1. Architect will select one room, area, or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each type of coating and substrate.
a.
b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply
coatings in this room or to each surface as specified. Provide the required sheen, color,
and texture of each surface.
a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating
systems of a similar nature.
3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label with the following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
High-Performance Coatings 09 96 00 - 2
DPR09328

5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags
and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying coatings.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures
are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before
proceeding with or continuing coating operation.
2. Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are
enclosed and temperature within the area can be maintained within limits specified by
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra high-performance coating materials from the same production run as materials
applied and in quantities described below. Package coating materials in unopened, factorysealed
containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Quantity: Furnish extra coating materials in quantities indicated below:
a. Semigloss, Polyamide Epoxy Coatings: One case of each color applied.
2. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L) or 1 case, as
appropriate, of each material and color applied.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products indicated in the coating system
descriptions.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated in
the coating system descriptions.
C. Manufacturers' Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the coating system
descriptions by shortened versions of their names shown in parenthesis:
1. Pittsburgh Paint; PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
High-Performance Coatings 09 96 00 - 3
DPR09328

D. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible
with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,
as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
E. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's highest grade of the various high-performance coatings
specified. Materials not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
F. VOC Classification: Provide high-performance coating materials, including primers, undercoats,
and finish-coat materials, that have a VOC classification of 450 g/L or less.
2.02 COLORS
A. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.03 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SYSTEMS
A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the following finish
systems over interior concrete and brick masonry surfaces:
3.00 MILD ENVIRONMENT (SEMIGLOSS FINISH): ONE FINISH COAT TOPCOAT: POLYAMIDE-
EPOXY PPG: AQUAPON 35 POLYAMIDE-EPOXY EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. With Applicator present, examine substrates and conditions under which high-performance
coatings will be applied, for compliance with coating application requirements.
1. Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces to
receive coatings are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that particular
area.
3. Notify Architect about anticipated problems before using the coatings specified over substrates
primed by others.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not
to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers
skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying high-performance coatings, clean substrates of substances that
could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
High-Performance Coatings 09 96 00 - 4
DPR09328

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified.
1. Cementitious Substrates: Prepare concrete,. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or
sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods to prepare surfaces.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn,
correct this condition before application. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceeds
that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary,
strain coating material before using.
3. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
E. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied.
2. Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed
surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film.
3. Coating colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the coating system descriptions.
4. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.
5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, grilles, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide
desired protection.
a. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment
or furniture with prime coat only.
b. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged
items to match exposed surfaces.
B. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application
method.
a. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until coating has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel
High-Performance Coatings 09 96 00 - 5
DPR09328

sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
2. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
edges, corners, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces to ensure that
they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for material applied and of appropriate size
for the surface or item being coated.
a. Apply primers and first coats by brush unless manufacturer's written instructions
permit using roller or mechanical applicators.
b. Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film.
c. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or
other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use mechanical methods to apply coating if permitted by manufacturer's
written instructions and governing regulations.
a. Use spray equipment with orifice size recommended by manufacturer for material
and texture required.
b. Apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats.
c. Do not double back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of two coats in
one pass, unless recommended by manufacturer.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended
by manufacturer.
E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended
by manufacturer, to material required to be coated or finished that has not been prime coated
by others.
1. Recoat primed and sealed substrates if there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects caused by
insufficient sealing.
F. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner
deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required
by Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Absorption.
High-Performance Coatings 09 96 00 - 6
DPR09328

3.05 CLEANING
c. Accelerated weathering.
d. Accelerated yellowness.
e. Color retention.
f. Alkali and mildew resistance.
g. Abrasion resistance.
h. Apparent reflectivity.
i. Washability.
j. Dry opacity.
k. Recoating.
l. Skinning.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being
used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with
rejected materials. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove rejected materials
from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with specified materials, the two
coatings are not compatible.
A. Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
3.06 PROTECTION
1. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing coating operations,
remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
2. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
END OF SECTION
High-Performance Coatings 09 96 00 - 7
DPR09328

10 28 00 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Restroom accessories.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions.
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
4. Features that will be included for Project.
5. Manufacturer's warranty.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products
from single source from single manufacturer.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying
the Work.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-
inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating.
Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
DPR09328
10 28 00 - 1

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamperand-theft
resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
2.02 RESTROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
C. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. .
2. Description: Double-roll dispenser.B-6867.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Capacity: Designed for 5-inch- (127-mm-) diameter tissue rolls.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)
D. Grab Bar:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc B-6806 series .
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin)[ on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area].
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Mirror Unit:
1. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.
a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard
2. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated
below.
a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a
special tool to remove.
3. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2.03 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
DPR09328
10 28 00 - 2

1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2. Truebro by IPS Corporation.
B. Underlavatory:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent
direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
2.04 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Mop and Broom Holder
2.05 FABRICATION
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Custodial Equipment B-224x36.
2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf.
3. Length: 36 inches (914 mm).
4. Hooks: [Three].
5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb,
and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according
to ASTM F 446.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective
items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
DPR09328
10 28 00 - 3

10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.
B. Related Sections:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers."
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection
cabinets.
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet
type, trim style, and panel style.
B. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule
with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
C. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
1.06 SEQUENCING
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
DPR09328
10 44 13 - 1

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type
of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,
Class 1 (clear)].
2.02 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one
of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following]:
a. Fire End & Croker Corporation;.
b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;.
c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company;.
e. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc..
f. Moon-American; .
g. Potter Roemer LLC; .
h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc..
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated, 1-hour fire rated and 2-hour fire rated depending on partition
type where cabinet occurs. Refer to plans.
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from
0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-
mm-) thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
C. Cabinet Material: Aluminum sheet.
D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style
of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding
wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide
where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to
accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet or Extruded-aluminum shapes
F. Door Material: Extruded-aluminum shapes].
G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear.
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
DPR09328
10 44 13 - 2

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open
180 degrees.
J. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated,
with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.
3) Lettering Color: White.
4) Orientation: Vertical.
K. Finishes:
2.03 FABRICATING
1. Aluminum: Color anodic.
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.
2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch (13 mm) thick.
2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.
3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
2.04 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
DPR09328
10 44 13 - 3

2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
3.00 EXECUTION
1. Color: Clear Anodized.
2. Gloss.
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets will be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses forsemirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of
cabinet and trim style.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated[ or, if
not indicated, at heights indicated below:] [or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.]
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet.
B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.
4. Fire-Rated, Cabinets:
a. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) tolerance between pipe OD and
knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout.
b. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking
devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
DPR09328
10 44 13 - 4

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by
fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
DPR09328
10 44 13 - 5

10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
B. Related Sections:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher
and mounting brackets.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.01 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.
Fire Extinguishers 10 44 16 - 1
DPR09328

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
2. or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
e. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.
3. Valves: Manufacturer's standard
4. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix
B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance,
and recharging.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container EF1: UL-rated 3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)
nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel
container.
C. Carbon Dioxide Type EF2: UL-rated 10-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity, with carbon
dioxide in manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container.
2.02 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher
to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated,
with plated or red baked-enamel finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
b. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
c. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red
letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Vertical.
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Fire Extinguishers 10 44 16 - 2
DPR09328

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION
Fire Extinguishers 10 44 16 - 3
DPR09328

13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated sets of mutually dependent
components including structural framing, hanging battery charger tray, roof panels,
wall panels, soffit panels, doors and accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.03 DEFINITIONS
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete foundations, slabs, and anchorbolt
installation.
2. Division 8 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors."
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section.
4. Division 8 Section "Louvers and Vents" for metal louvers.
A. Bay: Dimension between main frames measured normal to frame (at centerline of frame) for
interior bays, and dimension from centerline of first interior main frame measured normal to
end wall (outside face of end-wall girt) for end bays.
B. Building Length: Dimension of the building measured perpendicular to main framing from
end wall to end wall (outside face of girt to outside face of girt).
C. Building Width: Dimension of the building measured parallel to main framing from sidewall to
sidewall (outside face of girt to outside face of girt).
D. Clear Span: Distance between supports of beams, girders, or trusses (measured from lowest
level of connecting area of a column and a rafter frame or knee).
E. Eave Height: Vertical dimension from finished floor to eave (the line along the sidewall
formed by intersection of the planes of the roof and wall).
F. Clear Height under Structure: Vertical dimension from finished floor to lowest point of any
part of primary or secondary structure, not including crane supports, located within clear
span.
G. Terminology Standard: Refer to MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for definitions of
terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced
standards.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 1
DPR09328

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard
mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable
of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure
to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and
secondary framing, metal roof panels, metal wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements
indicated.
1. Provide metal building system of size and with spacings, slopes, and spans indicated.
B. Primary Frame Type:
1. Rigid Clear Span: Solid-member, structural-framing system without interior columns.
C. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard, for buildings not required to be expandable,
consisting of primary frame, capable of supporting one-half of a bay design load, and endwall
columns.
D. Secondary Frame Type: Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and exterior-framed (bypass)
girts.
E. Eave Height: Manufacturer's standard height, as indicated by nominal height on Drawings.
F. Bay Spacing: As indicated.
G. Roof Slope: As indicated.
H. Roof System: Manufacturer's standard trapezoidal-rib standing-seam metal roof panels.
I. Exterior Wall System: Manufacturer's standard field-assembled, uninsulated metal wall panels.
1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Engineer metal building systems according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building
Systems Manual."
a. Incorporate hanging battery charger tray detail into building design shop drawings.
2. Minimum Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings and as required per ASCE 7-05. Design
for additional loads as needed.
a. Provide support for hanging battery charger tray.
3. Load Combinations: Design metal building systems to withstand the most critical effects
of load factors and load combinations as required by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures" and MBMA specifications.
4. Deflection Limits: Engineer assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no
greater than the following:
a. Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.
b. Girts: Horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span.
c. Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span.
d. Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 2
DPR09328

e. Building Drift: Lateral deflection of 1/180 of the height.
5. Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure
and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings.
6. Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses
indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure
of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
C. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal panel assemblies with the following maximum
U-factors and minimum R-values for opaque elements when tested according to
ASTM C 1363 or ASTM C 518:
1. Metal Roof Panel Assemblies:
a. R-Value: 19
2. Metal Wall Panel Assemblies:
a. R-Value: 13
D. Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06
cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative
test-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
E. Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06
cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at static-airpressure
difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
F. Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa).
G. Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design
pressure of not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12 lbf/sq. ft. (575
Pa).
H. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for
Class 90.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of the following metal building system
components:
1. Structural-framing system.
2. Metal roof panels.
3. Metal wall panels.
4. Translucent panels.
5. Insulation.
6. Flashing and trim.
7. Doors.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 3
DPR09328

8. Accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation work begins. Include location,
diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation.
Indicate column reactions at each location.
3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing;
include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing
between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections.
4. Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including
methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners,
anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factoryand
field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners.
a. Show roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports
and penetrations, lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items mounted on roof curbs.
b. Show wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
c. Show translucent panels.
5. Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-
1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:8):
a. Flashing and trim.
b. Gutters.
c. Downspouts.
C. Roof ventilators.Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of building component with factory-applied
color finish.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
sizes indicated below.
1. Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Nominal 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width.
Include fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories.
2. Translucent Panels: Nominal 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width.
3. Flashing and Trim: Nominal 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
4. Vapor Retarders: Nominal 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples.
5. Windows: Full-size, nominal 12-inch- (300-mm-) long frame Samples showing typical
profile.
6. Accessories: Nominal 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for each type of accessory.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of metal building system, signed by product manufacturer.
1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Include the following:
a. Name and location of Project.
b. Order number.
c. Name of manufacturer.
d. Name of Contractor.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 4
DPR09328

e. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope.
f. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for
cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard.
g. Governing building code and year of edition.
h. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection,
wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak
velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes).
i. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated
loads, according to governing building code.
j. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance
factors.
k. ICC International Accreditation Service, Inc.: Include statement that metal building
system and components were designed and produced in an IAS Accredited Facility
by an IAS Accredited Manufacturer. Metal Buidling System Manufacturer shall meet
the criteria of AC 472 Inspection Programs for Manufacturer’s of Metal Building Systems.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Erector Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erector complies with requirements.
H. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products comply with requirements.
I. Qualification Data: For Erector and Manufacturer.
J. Material Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply
with requirements:
1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties.
2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
4. Shop primers.
5. Nonshrink grout.
K. Source quality-control test reports.
L. Field quality-control test reports.
M. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation and vapor retarders. Include
reports for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission,
and water absorption.
N. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
O. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Schedule: For doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
Include details of reinforcement.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 5
DPR09328

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable
to manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA.
1. IAS Certification for AC 472: An IAS AC 472 Accredited Manufacturer that designs and
produces metal building systems and components in an IAS AC 472 Accredited Facility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329
for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain primary metal building system components, including structural
framing and metal panel assemblies, through one source from a single manufacturer.
E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal
building system and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.
F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
G. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,” AISC 360-
05 for design requirements.
H. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members," or AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel
Structural Members," for design requirements and allowable stresses.
I. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide field-insulated metal panels having thermal insulation
materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing
identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Pre-Erection Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to metal building systems including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
2. Review structural load limitations.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Erector's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
5. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for unfavorable conditions.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 6
DPR09328

K. Preinstallation Roof Assembly Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply
with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods
and procedures related to metal roof panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Examine purlin and rafter conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness
and attachment to structural members.
2. Review structural limitations of purlins and rafters during and after roofing.
3. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels.
4. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof panel assembly during and after
installation.
5. Review roof observation and repair procedures after metal roof panel installation.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged
or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight
and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness and with positive slope for
drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause
staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit metal
panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements:
1. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved
anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating
structural framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation
to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
2. Established Dimensions for Metal Panels: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed
with fabricating metal panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming metal
panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of
structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into
foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified
in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate installation of equipment supports and roof penetrations. Coordinate metal panel
assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other adjoining
work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 7
DPR09328

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's warranty in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factoryapplied
finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's
warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam, metal roof panel
assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, with a zero dollar limit, within
specified warranty period.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Tyson Building
2. Alliance Steel, Inc.
3. American Buildings Company.
4. American Steel Building Company, Inc.; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP.
5. Behlen Mfg. Co.
6. Butler Manufacturing Company.
7. Ceco Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation.
8. Garco Building Systems.
9. Gulf States Manufacturers, Inc.
10. Mesco Metal Buildings; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP.
11. Metallic Metal Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP.
12. Nucor Building Systems
13. Package Industries, Inc.
14. Spirco Manufacturing; Division of Metal Building Products, Inc.
15. Star Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation.
16. United Structures of America, Inc.
2.02 STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55.
B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55; or
ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55.
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 8
DPR09328

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.
E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing.
F. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through
55, or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70; or cold-rolled,
ASTM A 1008, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80, or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel
(HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70.
G. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 or
High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80; with G60 coating designation;
mill phosphatized.
H. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the
hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33
through 80 or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80; with G90
coating designation.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50
or 80; with Class AZ50 coating.
I. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hexhead
bolts; ASTM A 563 carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
J. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel
washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
2. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1,
heavy-hex-head steel structural bolts with splined ends.
a. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
K. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Configuration: Straight.
2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel.
3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel.
4. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
5. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
L. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel.
2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
4. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
M. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36.
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel.
2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
3. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 9
DPR09328

N. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.
2.03 MATERIALS FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the
hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS),
Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550), with G90 (Z275) coating designation.
2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
3. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on Drawings:
a. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical
Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating;
Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of
specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not
less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and
apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating
and resin manufacturers' written instructions, except as modified below:
b. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or lightcolored
backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a total minimum
dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
2.04 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS
A. Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type I, or NAIMA 202, glass-fiber-blanket insulation;
0.5-lb/cu. ft. (8-kg/cu. m) density; 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs;
and with a flame-spread index of 25 or less.
2.05 DOOR AND FRAME MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs,
and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with
heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied
coating.
1. Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel
screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or
neoprene sealing washer.
2. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel
screws, with nylon or polypropylene washer.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 10
DPR09328

3. Fasteners for Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Self-drilling Type 410 stainless-steel or selftapping
Type 304 stainless-steel or zinc-alloy-steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC
washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels.
4. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer
head.
5. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
C. Backer Board: Hardboard complying with AHA A135.4, Class 1 tempered, 1/4 inch (6 mm)
thick, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate
grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application
and a 30-minute working time.
E. Metal Panel Sealants:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape of manufacturer's standard size.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or siliconerubber
sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in
metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended by metal building system
manufacturer.
2.07 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly.
1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection
drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.
2. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of
proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.
B. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual": Chapter IV, Section 9,
"Fabrication and Erection Tolerances."
C. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
1. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of metal panel.
2.08 STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. General:
1. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with
baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into
place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly.
a. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 11
DPR09328

. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged arc-welding
process.
c. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural
tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so flange compressive
strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings.
d. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing members.
e. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop
prime primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication.
2. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by
roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates
required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing
for bolted field connections to primary framing.
a. Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts.
b. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2.
Shop prime uncoated secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication.
B. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to
withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse
and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and
corner columns; and wind bracing.
1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members.
Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated.
a. Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's
standard, as approved by Architect.
2. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up
steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted.
3. Frame Configuration: Single gable Multistory.
4. Exterior Column Type: Uniform depth
5. Rafter Type: Uniform depth or Tapered.
C. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for fieldbolted
assembly to comply with the following:
1. End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from structural-steel
shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel
sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch.
D. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members, including purlins,
girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and
other miscellaneous structural members. Fabricate framing from cold-formed, structural-steel
sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating, unless otherwise
indicated, to comply with the following:
1. Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet,
built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch-wide flanges.
a. Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Purlins: Steel joists of depths indicated.
3. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet,
built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening
lips angled 40 to 50 degrees to flange and with minimum 2-1/2-inch-wide flanges.
a. Depth: 8”.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 12
DPR09328

4. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from 0.0598-inch-thick steel
sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for
metal panels.
5. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles or 1-inch diameter,
cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges.
6. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles.
7. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-by-0.0598-inch zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet.
8. Purlin and Girt Clips: Minimum 0.0598-inch-thick, steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips
where clips are connected to galvanized framing members.
9. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from minimum
0.0598-inch-thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet
10. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch-thick,
cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of
door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.
11. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from
cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet; designed to withstand required loads.
E. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows:
1. Rods: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50; minimum 1/2-
inch-diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches at each end.
2. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required
to withstand design loads.
3. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel
shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.
4. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through
diaphragm action of metal panels.
F. Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish
painted. Provide hot-dipped galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized.
G. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Prime primary, secondary, and end-wall structural-framing members to a minimum dry
film thickness of 1 mil.
a. Prime secondary steel framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil on each side.
2. Prime galvanized members with specified primer, after phosphoric acid pretreatment.
2.09 METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major
ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be
field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels
to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.
1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0209 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
a. a. Exterior Finish: [Fluoropolymer] .
b. Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
2.Major-Rib Spacing:12 inches (305 mm)
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 13
DPR09328

2. Panel Coverage: 36 inches (914 mm).
Panel Height: 1.125 inches (29 mm).
2.10 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL WALL PANELS
A. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal
major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed
to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching
panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.
1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0209 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches (305 mm) o.c.
3. Panel Coverage: 36 inches (914 mm).
4. Panel Height: 1.5 inches (38 mm).
2.11 TRANSLUCENT PANELS
A. Insulated Translucent Panels: Fabricate insulating units of 2 sheets of glass-fiber-reinforced
polyester, translucent plastic separated by an air space; complying with ASTM D 3841,
Type CC1 (limited flammability) , Grade 1 (weather resistant); smooth finish on both sides.
Match profile of adjacent metal panels.
1. Exterior Panel Weight: Not less than 8 oz./sq. ft. (2441 g/sq. m) .
2. Light Transmittance: Not less than 42 percent according to ASTM D 1494.
3. Metal Edge: Fabricate full length of each side of panel with metal edge for seaming into
standing-seam roof panel joint.
4. Color: White.
B. Mastic for Translucent Panels: Nonstaining, saturated vinyl polymer as recommended by
translucent panel manufacturer for sealing laps.
2.12 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be field assembled by lapping
and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through
panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for
weathertight installation.
B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal roof panels.
1. Finish: Match finish and color of metal roof panels.
C. Concealed-Fastener Metal Soffit Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and flush surface;
with flush joint between panels; with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide flange for attaching interior finish;
designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels
and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps.
1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0209 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Panel Coverage: 12 inches (305 mm).
3. Panel Height: 1 inch (25 mm).
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 14
DPR09328

2.13 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Fire-Rated Personnel Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure.
2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,
provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated
door assemblies except for size.
B. Swinging Personnel Doors and Frames: Metal building system manufacturer's standard
doors and frames; prepared and reinforced at strike and hinges to receive factory- and fieldapplied
hardware according to ANSI/DHI A115 Series.
1. Steel Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick; fabricated from 0.0329-inch- (0.85-mm-) uncoated
thickness, metallic-coated steel face sheets; of styles indicated; seamless at both
vertical edges; with 0.0528-inch- (1.35-mm-) uncoated thickness, inverted metallic-coated
steel channels welded to face sheets at top and bottom of door.
a. Core: Polyurethane foam with U-factor rating of at least 0.07 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F
(0.40 W/sq. m x K).
2. Steel Frames: Fabricate 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide face frames from 0.0528-inch- (1.35-mm)
uncoated thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet.
a. Type: Factory welded.
3. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, and moldings from either
cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
4. Hardware: Refer to Hardware specification 08 71 00
5. Fabrication: Fabricate doors and frames to be rigid; neat in appearance; and free from
defects, warp, or buckle. Provide continuous welds on exposed joints; grind, dress, and
make welds smooth, flush, and invisible.
1) Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria.
b. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard 2-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat.
2.14 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as
specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly
including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal
roof panels.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 15
DPR09328

2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet, designed to withstand negativeload
requirements.
3. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel sheet.
4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
5. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
6. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal
spacer blocks of thickness required to provide 1 inch (25 mm) standoff; fabricated from
extruded polystyrene.
C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly
including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall
panels.
2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
D. Flashing and Trim: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- (0.40-mm-) thick, metallic-coated
steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to
match adjacent metal panels.
1. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed
openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
2. Opening Trim: Minimum 0.0269-inch- (0.70-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or
aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb
of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.
E. Gutters: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- (0.40-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or
aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof
fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and
other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2438-mm-) long sections,
sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 36 inches
(900 mm) o.c.
2. Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets.
F. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0159-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to
match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with
formed elbows and offsets.
1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 10 feet (3
m) o.c.
G. Roof Ventilators: Gravity type, complete with hardware, flashing, closures, and fittings.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 16
DPR09328

1. Circular-Revolving Type: Minimum 20-inch- (508-mm-) diameter throat opening; fabricated
from minimum 0.0209-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc
alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal
roof panels; with matching base and rain cap.
a. Type: Stationary revolving.
b. Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.041-inch (1.04-
mm) wire.
c. Dampers: Spring-loaded, butterfly type; pull-chain operation; with pull chain of length
required to reach within 36 inches (914 mm) above floor.
d. Reinforce and brace units, with joints properly formed and edges beaded to be watertight
under normal positive-pressure conditions.
e. Mount ventilators on square-to-round bases for ridge or on-slope mounting, designed
to match roof pitch and roll formed to match metal roof panel profile.
H. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.
2.15 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components
are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed
to minimize contrast.
2.16 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the
following tests and inspections and to submit reports.
B. Special Inspector: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
tests and inspections and to submit reports. Special Inspector will verify that manufacturer
maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and will review the completeness
and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
1. Special inspections will not be required if fabrication is performed by a manufacturer registered
and approved by authorities having jurisdiction to perform such Work without special
inspection.
a. After fabrication, submit certificate of compliance with copy to authorities having jurisdiction
certifying that Work was performed according to Contract requirements.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections shall be inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections shall be
tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at
inspector's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 17
DPR09328

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the
Contract Documents.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Erector, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing
surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive
structural framing, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building
system manufacturer's tolerances.
1. Engage land surveyor to perform surveying.
C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for
each particular substrate condition.
B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads
equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural
framing, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
3.03 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and
erection drawings.
B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building
system manufacturer's professional engineer.
C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during
erection.
D. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and
roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do
not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's
written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 18
DPR09328

E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean
bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform
necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature
when structure will be completed and in service.
F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure.
Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with
double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level
base-line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than seven days after placement.
1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of
joint specified.
a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned.
G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary
framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high-strength
bolts.
1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae.
2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.
3. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows,
louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.
H. Steel Joists: Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to
supporting construction according to SJI's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight
Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and
requirements in this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that
joists are stabilized during construction.
4. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening
requirements.
5. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or
beams.
I. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.
1. Tighten rod bracing to avoid sag.
2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.
J. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and
to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and
electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.
K. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC's "Code
of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 19
DPR09328

3.04 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural panel support
members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer.
1. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before metal
panel installation.
B. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings
as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel
finishes.
a. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by
manufacturer.
2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar
elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in
alignment. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
6. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.
C. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque
adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or
metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.
1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints.
Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated
items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to
line.
D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying
rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation
as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
E. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required
for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers,
and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
1. Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal
side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
3.05 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated
or restricted by shipping limitations.
1. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.
2. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with
self-tapping screws.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 20
DPR09328

B. Field-Assembled, Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with
exposed fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal roof panels.
2. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding
equipment, vents, and accessories.
3. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end
laps and on side laps of nesting-type metal panels; on side laps of ribbed or fluted metal
panels; and elsewhere as needed to make metal panels weatherproof to driving rains.
4. At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with
butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
C. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or selftapping
screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits,
along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.
D. Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and
within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.06 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.
Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated.
Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib
lined up with line of framing.
2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.
3. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches (102 mm) minimum.
4. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable
panels over metal wall panels at eave height.
5. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
6. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter
of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
7. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
8. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.
9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete,
and elsewhere as indicated, or if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
10. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws.
11. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
B. Field-Assembled, Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach
metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Field-Insulated Assemblies: Install thermal insulation as specified. Install metal liner panels
over insulation on interior side of girts at locations indicated. Fasten with exposed
fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 21
DPR09328

3.07 TRANSLUCENT PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Translucent Panels: Attach translucent panels to structural framing with fasteners according
to manufacturer's written instructions. Install panels perpendicular to supports, unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor translucent panels securely in place, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement.
1. Provide end laps of not less than 6 inches (152 mm) and side laps of not less than 1-1/2-
inch (38-mm) corrugations for metal roof panels.
2. Align horizontal laps with adjacent metal panels.
3. Seal intermediate end laps and side laps of translucent panels with translucent mastic.
3.08 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing.
B. Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures where panels meet walls and at perimeter
of all openings.
3.09 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS
A. General: Install insulation concurrently with metal wall panel installation, in thickness indicated
to cover entire wall, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
3. Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarder-faced blankets straight and true in one-piece
lengths with both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder.
4. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over insulation
with both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder.
B. Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method:
1. Over-Framing Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular
to top flange of secondary framing members. Hold in place by metal roof panels fastened
to secondary framing.
2. Between-Purlin Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder between purlins. Carry
vapor-retarder facing tabs up and over purlin, overlapping adjoining facing of next insulation
course maintaining continuity of retarder. Hold in place with bands and crossbands
below insulation.
3. Over-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over
and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Install layer of filler insulation
over first layer to fill space formed by metal roof panel standoffs. Hold in place by
panels fastened to standoffs.
4. Two-Layers-between-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor
retarder between purlins. Carry vapor-retarder facing tabs up and over purlin, overlapping
adjoining facing of next insulation course maintaining continuity of retarder. Install
layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space between purlins formed by thermal
spacer blocks. Hold in place with bands and crossbands below insulation.
5. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and
taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 22
DPR09328

6. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal roof panels attach directly to purlins, install thermal
spacer blocks.
C. Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top
flange of secondary framing members. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary
framing.
1. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and
taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.
2. Sound-Absorption Insulation: Where sound-absorption requirement is indicated for metal
liner panels, cover insulation with polyethylene film and provide inserts of wire mesh to
form acoustical spacer grid.
3.10 DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation with wall flashings
and other components. Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant
used for metal wall panels.
B. Personnel Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames according to ANSI A250.8. Shim as
necessary to comply with DHI A115.IG. Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective
frames, with the following clearances:
1. Between Doors and Frames at Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. At Door Sills with Threshold: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
4. At Door Sills without Threshold: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).
5. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to, and doors with clearances specified in,
NFPA 80.
3.11 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting,
and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings,
ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items.
2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners,
seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
3. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,
joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to
form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof
and weather-resistant performance.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 23
DPR09328

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24
inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions
cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof,
form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep,
filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters
to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) o.c. using manufacturer's
standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal
expansion.
D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at
top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
2. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
E. Circular Roof Ventilators: Set ventilators complete with necessary hardware, anchors, dampers,
weather guards, rain caps, and equipment supports. Mount ventilators on flat level
base. Install preformed filler strips at base to seal ventilator to metal roof panels.
F. Louvers: Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent
work.
1. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
2. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers.
3. Protect galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by
applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete,
masonry, or dissimilar metals.
4. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation
progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.
G. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and
seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the
following tests and inspections and to submit reports.
B. Special Inspector: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
tests and inspections and to submit reports.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be inspected during installation
according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490
Bolts."
2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be
tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at
inspector's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 24
DPR09328

. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the
Contract Documents.
3.13 ADJUSTING
A. Doors: After completing installation, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp,
twist, or distortion.
B. Roof Ventilators After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test,
and adjust units to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion as needed to provide fully
functioning units.
3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according
to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
C. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections,
rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing
plates, and accessories.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 3,
"Power Tool Cleaning."
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
E. Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal
panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as
recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
1. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
F. Doors and Frames: Immediately after installation, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
1. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.
G. Windows: Clean metal surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other
substances. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows.
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 25
DPR09328

3.15 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain operable accessories. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
END OF SECTION
Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 - 26
DPR09328

13 85 10 FIRE SPRINKLER MONITORING SYSTEM
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire sprinkler monitoring system with manual station, detectors, notification
appliances, signal equipment, controls, and devices. The system, accessories, and functions
shall be configured to comply with the drawings, specifications, and all related codes
and standards including but not limited to those listed and described in Section 1.02
DEFINITIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS.
B. Occupancy classification for this building is:
1. Group “B” – Office/Storage Areas.
2. Group “H” – Fertilizer/Chemical Room.
C. Provide a noncoded, analog addressable system; multiplexed signal transmission dedicated
to fire alarm service only.
1.02 DEFINITIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. International Fire Code, 2006 Edition.
B. International Mechanical Code, 2006 Edition.
C. National Electrical code, 2005 Edition.
D. City of Dallas amendments and ordinances.
E. American with Disabilities Act (ADA), latest Edition.
F. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS).
G. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction.
H. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.
I. LED: Light-emitting diode.
J. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
K. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code, latest Edition.
L. NFPA 13: National Sprinkler Code.
M. Class “A”: Term as defined in NFPA 72.
N. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide fire alarm control panel, devices, and associated conduit/wiring etc as specified
to serve the new Parks and Recreation Facility. All fire alarm wiring shall be in metal
conduit. Program and test the final installation in accordance with all applicable codes and
ordinances. System shall be monitored by remote alarm receiving station. Obtain AHJ’s approval
of finished installation.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Comply with NFPA 72.
2. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
a. Manual stations.
b. Smoke detectors.
c. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
Fire Alarm and Detection System 13 85 10-1
DPR09328

3. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
a. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
b. Identify alarm at the FACP.
c. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
d. Record events in the system memory.
4. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
a. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance
circuits.
b. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
c. Loss of primary power at the FACP.
d. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.
e. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.
f. A break in standby battery circuitry.
g. Failure of battery charging.
h. Low-air-pressure switch operation on preaction sprinkler system.
i. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP.
5. System Trouble Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the FACP. Record event.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Qualified Installers and Superintendent:
1. Submit copy of certification indicating installing firm is an authorized distributor of the fire
alarm equipment.
2. Submit copy of certification indicating installing personnel have received factory training
and are licensed by the Texas State Fire Marshal’s Office as Fire Alarm Technicians.
3. Submit copy of license indicating that the responsible fire alarm Superintendent is currently
licensed by the Texas State Fire Marshal’s Office as a Fire Alarm Planning Superintendent
(APS).
D. Shop Drawings:
1. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually
and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions
for generic systems are not acceptable.
2. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
3. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, conduit fill calculations (maximum
40%) and cable and wire types and sizes.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and
for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code.
E. Batteries:
1. Calculate standby battery requirements per manufacturers installation requirements including
aging factors and all other recommended factors.
Fire Alarm and Detection System 13 85 10-2
DPR09328

2. Provide batteries with ampere - hour capacity rated at 150% above the minimum required
calculated value (24 hours normal operation plus 5 minutes alarm operation).
F. Voltage Drop Calculations:
1. Provide voltage drop calculations using the lumped load calculation method (all devices
assumed at the end of the circuit). Use the current consumption of the device at its lowest
operating voltage rating.
2. Provide calculations showing that with a supply of 24.0 volts, measured at the point of
connection to the notification circuit, the last device shall have no less than 21.6 volts
measured across its terminals. The last device shall be the device which has the lowest
voltage measured across its terminals as determined by measurements taken from the
FACP to the last device in each leg of a Class A circuit.
3. Size all wiring for a 20% increase in the number of devices and conductor length added
to a circuit will not lower the voltage drop at the last device below 21.6 volts as indicated
in paragraph 1.02 (E) (2). Include this calculation with the submittal.
4. Calculations shall prove that no individual initiating, signaling or notification appliance circuit
is loaded more than 80% of its capacity. Calculations shall prove that the total connected
load for each remote power supply or FACP power supply is 80% or less of its
capacity.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Operation and maintenance data.
I. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): In addition to distribution requirements
for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities
having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings
as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or
revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction,
submit them to Architect for review. If special permit fees are required for AHJ review and
approval, this cost shall be included in the fire alarm contractors bid.
J. Documentation:
1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to
NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to
NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Format of the written
sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The fire alarm installing firm shall be an authorized distributor for the local region in which the
project resides, as defined by the manufacturer of the fire alarm control panel and shall have
an office located within 75 miles of the Owner’s facility.
B. The installing firm shall be currently licensed in the State of Texas with an ACR# in good
standing and shall have been in the business of designing, installing and servicing commercial
fire alarm/life safety systems for not less than 5 years.
C. The installing firm shall employ a minimum of two (2) persons with training certificates indicating
that same individuals have received factory training to install the manufacturer’s fire alarm
system. Both of these persons must be Texas licensed Fire Alarm Technicians. The certificates
shall indicate that the training has been completed recently, within three (3) years of the
project bid date. Only factory-trained individuals will be allowed to install fire alarm devices
and wiring.
D. The installing firm shall employ, on a full-time basis, a minimum of one (1) individual who is licensed
by the Texas State Fire Marshal’s Office as a Fire Alarm Planning Superintendent
(APS). Alternatively, this person may be a licensed Fire Protection Engineer.
Fire Alarm and Detection System 13 85 10-3
DPR09328

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide all new products by one of the following:
1. FACP and Equipment:
a. Edwards Systems Technology Inc.
b. Honeywell International Inc.
c. NOTIFIER.
d. Silent Knight.
e. Gamewell-FCI.
f. Approved equal.
2. Wire and Cable shall be as recommended by the system manufacturer or one of the following:
a. Comtran Corporation.
b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.
c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation.
a. DRAKA USA.
b. West Penn Wire/CDT.
3. Audible and Visual Devices:
a. As manufactured by the FACP manufacturer.
b. System Sensor.
c. Wheelock.
d. Approved equal.
2.02 FACP
A. General Description:
1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
2. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator
at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision.
Display time and date, alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, two line(s) of 20 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands.
3. Alarm History: Capability to display/call-up alarm history report for a minimum of 500
events at this display shall be provided.
4. It shall be possible to view a sensitivity test report from this display for all smoke detectors
connected to the system.
C. Circuits:
1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style 6.
Fire Alarm and Detection System 13 85 10-4
DPR09328

a. System Layout: Install no more than 80% of the addressable device listed capacity
on each signaling line circuit. Spare capacity for addressable detectors and modules
shall be evenly distributed across SLC’s.
2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B, Style X.
3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, annunciation, and actuation of suppression
systems shall occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.
4. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, complying
with ANSI S3.41.
D. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for supervision
of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc
component shall be from the ac supply.
E. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP and remote
annunciator, after initiating devices are restored to normal.
1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates
an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances
until silencing switch is operated again.
F. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating
devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACP shall
display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing ceases while in walk-test mode,
after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return to normal.
G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble, and
supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator transmitter
and telephone lines.
H. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory and digital
alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc source. The fire alarm system
in its entirety shall be classified as “power-limited”.
1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the
power-supply module rating.
2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the service
entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
POWER."
I. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and
an automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
J. Surge Protection:
1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACP and its accessories. Comply
with Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Surge Suppression" for auxiliary panel suppressors.
2. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all system wiring
external to the building housing the FACP.
K. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or
glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the
system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
Fire Alarm and Detection System 13 85 10-5
DPR09328

2.03 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in
contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed
outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type. With
integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
2.04 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Description:
1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to the FACP.
3. Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted to a fixed base. Provide
terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring.
4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require manual resetting at the detector or readjustment
after actuation to restore them to normal operation.
5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and poweron
or polling status.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested
according to UL 268A.
3. Detector sensitivity shall be permitted to be adjusted individually based on environmental,
location or other factors.
2.05 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting
assembly.
B. Horns: Electronic type, polarized – High-output, 24-V dcHorns shall produce a soundpressure
level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn.
C. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white
polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate.
1. Rated Light Output: Candela output as required by NFPA 72, Chapter 4.
2. Visual Alarm Devices shall have a field selectable candela output from the device and the
candela output setting of the device shall be clearly discernable from the outside of the
device without requiring to disassemble the device or remove it from the wall.
D. Combination Horn/Visible Alarm Devices: Combination type devices will be allowed where
appropriate for the installation so long as they comply with B & C in the preceding paragraphs.
2.06 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
Fire Alarm and Detection System 13 85 10-6
DPR09328

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address for
listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. Provide UL
Listed End-of-Line Resistors where installed.
2.07 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Listed and labeled according to UL 632. Transmitter shall be integrated within the fire alarm
control panel thus not requiring a separate enclosure or power source.
B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the
FACP, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a
remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted.
The unit shall supervise two telephone lines. If service on either line is interrupted for
longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating
loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When
telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central station. If
service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.
C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger shall be provided by
the FACP.
D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
E. Monitoring Service: The fire alarm contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s selected
monitoring service provider and provide all labor, material, and devices necessary to achieve
successful monitoring of the building fire alarm system. The cost for the phone lines and
maintaining the phone service shall be the owner’s responsibility.
2.08 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with
NFPA 70, Article 760 and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer.
Shielding shall only be required if required or recommended by the system manufacturer.
C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, colorcoded
insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum for SLC’s and No. 12 AWG for NAC’s.
2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Manual Pull Stations:
1. Provide a manual pull station near the FACP as directed by the AHJ. Provide additional
manual pull stations as required by the AHJ.
B. Smoke detectors: Install smoke detector above FACP. Provide additional smoke detectors
as required by the AHJ. Installation shall conform to NFPA 72.
C. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install in locations as required to achieve at least 15dBA
above the average ambient sound level or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level having a
duration of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured 5 feet above the floor in the
occupiable area. Audible signaling shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72 4-3.2 “Public
Mode Audible Requirements”.
D. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install wall-mounted devices such that the entire lens is not
less than 80 inches and not greater than 96 inches above the finished floor. Alternatively,
ceiling-mounted devices may be used. Visible signaling shall meet the requirements of NFPA
Fire Alarm and Detection System 13 85 10-7
DPR09328

72 4-4 “Visible Characteristics, Public Mode”. Combine visible alarm-indicating devices with
audible alarm-indicating devices where possible.
E. Combination Devices: Install wall-mounted devices such that the entire lens is not less than
80 inches and not greater than 96 inches above the finished floor. Ceiling-mounted devices
may be utilized.
F. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
G. FACP: Surface mount with top of cabinet not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
Install FACP in Storage #111 or as directed by the AHJ.
H. Knox box: Provide knox box and install in location acceptable to AHJ. Knox box shall be supervised.
3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring according to the following:
1. NECA 1.
2. TIA/EIA 568-A.
B. Wiring Method: Install all fire alarm wiring in metal raceway.
1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system
shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any
other wire or cable.
2. Paint all conduit junction box and pull-box covers used for the fire alarm system red.
Paint or affix a red tape band on all fire alarm conduit at intervals not to exceed every 25
feet for ready service identification.
C. Wiring Method:
1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated
with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.
2. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the same cable
or raceway as signaling line circuits.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended
by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and
back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated
with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's
wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type
terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory
circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits.
Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices.
G. Wiring to phone demarcation point for the two dedicated phone lines for the off-site monitoring
shall be installed in conduit. Verify demarcation point with Owner.
H. Splices: Splices shall not be permitted between devices and/or equipment. All terminations
shall occur on the listed devices or at the control units using screw-type terminals.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section
“Electrical Identification."
Fire Alarm and Detection System 13 85 10-8
DPR09328

B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from
main service ground to the FACP.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the
form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings
and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or
nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.
4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72.
a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of
sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.
B. As-Built and Record Drawings shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner during the
Owner’s Training:
1. The fire alarm contractor shall prepare one set in electronic format (AutoCad) and one set
of reproducibles for as-built record drawings showing exact device installation locations
and the conduit routings for all equipment.
2. The fire alarm contractor shall provide a single-line wiring diagram showing the electrical
order in which all of the addressable devices have been wired. This can be in the form of
a device wiring map or a separate field verified riser diagram . This diagram must show
the device address and its position in relation to the other devices electrically on the SLC
Loop(s).
3.06 WARRANTY
A. Warranty service shall be provided for a period of one-year from date of final acceptance/certification.
B. Warranty response shall be within 24 hours of receipt of call Monday – Friday during normal
business hours.
3.07 INSPECTIONS & MAINTENANCE
A. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall make available to the Owner for consideration at the time of
final completion/system acceptance a service agreement proposal for testing and inspecting
the entire system in accordance with NFPA 72 during the warranty period and option for extended
full-coverage maintenance and testing of the system and components for five years.
END OF SECTION
Fire Alarm and Detection System 13 85 10-9
DPR09328

21 11 00 FACILITY FIRE SUPRESSION WATER SERVICE PIPING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pipes, valves, and fittings
normally encountered in fire protection systems, to provide complete and operating systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
1. The installer shall be a qualified fire protection contractor, licensed by the State of Texas,
Commission on Fire Prevention and Fire Marshall’s office.
2. The contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the design and
installation of fire suppression systems similar to this project. Submit a list of ten (10)
projects including references, names and telephone numbers of successfully completed
projects similar to the project.
3. Welders shall meet the requirements of AWS D10.9, Level AR.3.
B. PLANS REVIEW
1. Submit complete fire protection design documents to the City of Dallas, Texas, Fire
Prevention Bureau for review and approval.
2. Submit complete fire protection design documents to the State of Texas, Fire Marshal’s
office for review. Provide a letter to the Architect/Engineer indicating that documents
have been reviewed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Document remarks,
indicating the names of reviewers and dates, or provide a copy of approvals.
C. SOURCE OF MATERIALS
1. Provide products from domestic manufacturers who are regularly engaged in the
production and manufacture of such equipment.
2. Valves shall be the U.L. listed and F.M. approved with the label or marking, including the
pressure rating marked on the valve body.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Pipe installation shop drawings, and hydraulic calculations.
B. Identification of manufacturer and model number for all proposed material.
C. Pipe materials proposed, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals.
D. Valve data and ratings.
E. Certification of material compliance with all listed industry standards.
1.04 STANDARDS
The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety:
A. 2000 International Fire Code (IFC), with any local city amendments.
Facility Fire Suppression Water Service Piping 21 11 00-1
DPR09328

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME) standards:
ANSI/ASME B15.4 Cast-iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250
ANSI/ASME B15.9
Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelded Fittings
ANSI/ASME B16.1 Cast-iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25,
125, 250 and 800
ANSI/ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ANSI/ASME B16.11
Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded
ANSI/ASME B16.18
Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings
ANSI/ASME B16.22
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ANSI/ASME B16.25
Buttwelding Ends
ANSI/ASME Sec. 9
Welding and Brazing Qualifications
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Testing and Materials
(ASTM) standards:
ANSI/ASTM A47
Malleable Iron Castings
ANSI/ASTM A135
Electric Resistance-welded Steel Pipe
ANSI/ASTM A234
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel
and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures
ANSI/ASTM B32
Solder Metal
ANSI/ASTM B36.10
Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
ANSI/ASTM A795
Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire
Protection Use
ANSI/ASTM B75
Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
ANSI/ASTM B88
Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Welding Society (AWS) codes:
ANSI/AWS A5.8
Brazing Filler Metal
ANSI/AWS D10.9
Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and
Welders for Piping and Tubing
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Water Works Association standards:
ANSI/AWWA C110
Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C151
Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast
ANSI/AWWA C606
Grooved and Shouldered Joints
F. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards:
ASTM A53
Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot-dipped, Zinc-coated Welded
and Seamless
ASTM B251
General Requirements for Wrought Seamless Copper and
Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM A536
Grooved Couplings and Fittings
G. National Fire Protection Association regulatory requirements:
NFPA 13
Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 26
Supervision of Water Supply Valves
NFPA 1961
Fire Hose
NFPA 1963
Fire Hose Connection Threads
NFPA 291
Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking
of Hydrants
Facility Fire Suppression Water Service Piping 21 11 00 - 2
DPR09328

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The fire protection system piping shall include the piping, all valves, piping, hangers, and
other necessary appurtenances for a complete and operable piping system.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe Fittings above Grade
1. Ferrous Pipe (welded and seamless)
a. Black steel pipe (for fire protection use) (ASTM A795, ANSI/ASTM A53), wrought
steel pipe (ANSI B36.10M), electric resistance welded pipe (ASTM A135); rolled
grooved steel pipe (ASTM A135 or A53).
b. Ferrous fittings, cast-iron threaded, Class 125 (ANSI B16.4) cast-iron flanged
(ANSI B16.1); malleable iron threaded fittings (Class 125) (ANSI B16.3); factory
wrought steel, buttweld (ANSI B16.9), (ANSI B16.25); forged steel, socket
welded or threaded (ANSI B16.11); rigid radius grooved systems (AWWA C606)
250 psig.
2. Copper Pipe and Tube (drawn, seamless)
a. Seamless, (ASTM B75/B88); wrought seamless copper and copper alloy tube
(ASTM B251) brazed joints (AWS A5.8 Class BCuP-3 or BCuP-4. Solder metal
95-5 tin antimony, grade 95 TA (ASTM B32.
b. Copper fittings; wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings (ANSI
B16.22); cast bronze solder-joint pressure fittings (ANSI B16.18).
2.02 VALVES, GENERAL PURPOSE
A. Gate Valves
1. Above ground valves; 2-1/2" and larger, cast-iron, rising stem, outside screw and yoke,
175 psig (ASTM A126, Class B), one piece yoke bonnet, bronze yoke bushings, solid
wedge discs, bronze for 3-1/2" and smaller valves, cast-iron with bronze disc ring above
3-1/2" pipe size, flanged 2" and smaller, bronze body, rising stem, outside screw and
yoke, 175 psig, threaded outlet (ANSI/ASME B1.20.1). Acceptable manufacturers:
Stockham, Clow, Central and Nibco.
B. Butterfly Valves
1. General: Wafer-type valves with components that extend beyond the valve body shall be
installed in a manner that does not interfere with the operation of any system component.
2. Slow-close, UL listed/FM approved outside indicating style, ductile iron body with EPDM
rubber molded or polymid finish, and cast-iron disc, EPDM coated, grooved, or wafer
style ends. Integral supervised open, double pole single throw supervisory tamper
switch. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Central, Model A-BFV; Victaulic, Series
708; Grinnell, GRUVLOK.
C. Ball Valves: for Water Shut-off
1. Ball valves 2" and less: Rated 175 lb. minimum water, oil, air and gas pressure, brass or
bronze construction, seat material as recommended by manufacturer for material
conveying, lever handle, threaded or soldered connections. Throttling valves shall be
provided with memory stops. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Crane, 9302,
9322; ITT Grinnell, 3500, 3500SJ; Milwaukee, BA-200, BA-250; Watts, B-6000, B-6001;
Nibco, T-580, S-580.
Facility Fire Suppression Water Service Piping 21 11 00 - 3
DPR09328

D. Ball Valves: UL listed/FM approved, supervised bronze body, (ASTM B584) 300 psi nonshock,
full port, design up to 2", standard port in 2-1/2" sizes. Cast bronze ball (ASTM B584)
coated wheel handle, with factory mounted internal tamper switch, grooved or threaded.
Acceptable manufacturers: Watts, Nibco, Victaulic and Stockham.
E. Globe Valves: For trim and drain use, UL listed/FM approved, 175 psig, bronze body (ASTM
B62) graphite impregnated packing, bronze packing nut, threaded. Acceptable
manufacturers: Watts, Nibco, Crane, Grinnell, Stockham and United.
F. Check Valves
1. Swing check: 2-1/2" and smaller, horizontal swing, renewable disc, bronze body (ASTM
B62) rubber (TFE) seat disc, threaded outlet. Acceptable manufacturers: Watts, Nibco
and Stockham.
2. Lift check: 2-1/2" and smaller, 250 psig non-shock inline lift type, bronze body (ASTM
B584) stainless steel seam (ASTM B582) 316 stainless steel spring, Buna-N rubber disc,
TFE seat ring, threaded outlet. Acceptable manufacturers: Nibco, Crane, Victaulic,
Grinnell and United.
3. Wafer Check: For all sizes, 250 psig, UL listed/FM approved, cast-iron body, stainless
steel clapper assembly resilient elastomer seal, non-shock enamel finish. Acceptable
manufacturers: Viking, Grinnell, Central and United.
G. Fire Department Siamese Connections (FDC)
3.00 EXECUTION
1. Flush Siamese FDC: UL listed/FM approved polished brass, straight body; two separate
drop clapper valves, plugs and chains, 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 4". Automatic ball drip drain,
escutcheon with integral raised lettering, "auto spkr". Acceptable manufacturers and
models: Elkhart, 166; Potter Roemer, 5020; and Allenco, 276.
2. Free Standing, Siamese FDC: UL listed/FM approved, two-way cast brass body,
polished brass finish 4" x 2-1/2" seamless cover sleeve, identification base plate.
Lettering on escutcheon: "auto spkr". Acceptable manufacturers: Elkhart, Potter,
Roemer and Allenco.
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter.
B. Remove burrs and bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
C. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly.
3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 for sprinkler systems and NFPA 14
for standpipe and hose systems.
B. Route piping in an orderly manner, plumb and parallel to the building structure. Maintain
gradient. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space and
other work.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
Facility Fire Suppression Water Service Piping 21 11 00 - 4
DPR09328

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing the pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
E. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points.
F. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with approved non-toxic joint
compound applied to male threads only.
G. In steel piping, main sized saddle branch connections or direct connection of branch lines to
the mains will be permitted if the main is one pipe size larger than the branch line for up to 6"
diameter mains and if the main is two pipe sizes larger than the branch for 8" and larger
mains. Do not project branch pipes inside the main.
H. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated to do so or without the specific
approval of the Engineer. When cutting is approved, the actual size of holes shall be no
larger than the diameter of the pipe plus 1/2" clearance.
I. Provide sleeves when penetrating floors and walls.
J. Seal pipe and sleeve penetration to achieve fire resistance equivalent to rating of the wall or
floor penetrated.
K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support
members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one (1)
coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Provide finish painting in accordance with Division 9,
PAINTING. Color shall be Red.
L. On main water supply piping below grade, install steel rod pipe clamps at the 90 degree bend
from horizontal to vertical riser. Provide approved thrust restraint systems.
M. Support horizontal piping from the structure using ferrous pipe hangers for ferrous pipe and
copper hangers for copper pipe and all-thread steel rods (or brass for copper). Provide pipe
hangers capable of supporting five (5) times the weight of the water-filled piping plus 250
pounds. The maximum spacing of hangers shall be not greater than 10' for pipe sizes up to
1-1/4" and 12' for larger pipe sizes. Supports for non-metallic pipe shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's requirements.
N. Support risers at the ground level and not less than each second floor in multi-floor
installations.
O. Inspector's test piping shall not be less than 1" diameter and each location shall be equipped
with a globe valve.
3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
B. Provide gate valves or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service.
C. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves and at low points of piping and apparatus.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform testing required by NFPA 13 and regulatory authorities. Include the cost of such
testing in the proposal.
Facility Fire Suppression Water Service Piping 21 11 00 - 5
DPR09328

B. Hydrostatically test fire systems at not less than 200 psig for two (2) hours, or at 50 psig in
excess of the maximum static pressure when the static pressure exceeds 215 psig. Measure
hydrostatic pressure at the low point of the system being tested.
C. Prepare a Material and Test Certificate, in accordance with NFPA 13. Obtain certificates of
approval from regulatory authorities. Submit certificates in the final submittal data to the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Facility Fire Suppression Water Service Piping 21 11 00 - 6
DPR09328

21 13 13 DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to design and install a complete
dry-pipe sprinkler system. Piping shall be in accordance with Section 21 11 00, FACILITY FIRE
SUPRESSION WATER SERVICE PIPING.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
1. The installer shall be a qualified fire protection contractor, licensed by the State of Texas,
Commission on Fire Prevention and Fire Marshall’s office.
2. The installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the design and
installation of fire suppression systems similar to this project. Submit a list of ten (10)
projects including references, names and telephone numbers of successfully completed
projects similar to the project.
B. PLANS REVIEW
1. Submit complete fire protection design documents to the City of Dallas, Texas, Fire
Prevention Bureau for review and approval.
2. Submit complete fire protection design documents to the Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ) for review. Provide a letter to the Architect/Engineer indicating that documents
have been reviewed by the AHJ. Document remarks, indicating the names of reviewers
and dates, or provide a copy of approvals.
C. WATER PRESSURE
Available water pressures and fire flow residual pressure information shall be obtained by the
contractor in accordance with NFPA 291 "Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Fire Hydrants".
D. INDUSTRY APPROVALS
Fire protection equipment and components shall be UL/FM listed, and bear the UL and FM
label or marking.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
1. Design data and calculations
2. Shop drawings
3. Specifications and product data for all equipment
4. Copies of approvals from the City authority having jurisdiction
5. Certification of testing and acceptance
6. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
a. Submit operation and maintenance manuals for approval.
b. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements,
and record drawings.
c. Provide typed instructions relative to the sprinkler controls. Encase instructions in
metal frame with glass or lucite cover and mount as instructed.
Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 13 - 1
DPR09328

B. Prepare record drawings which include a set of shop drawings approved by the proper
agencies and red-marked to show any revisions made at the job site. Include certificates of
approval for the system, issued by the regulatory agencies, or as required by this section.
1.04 HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS
Hydraulic calculations shall be as outlined in NFPA 13 except that calculations shall be
performed by computer using software specifically designed for fire protection system design.
Software which uses k-factors for typical branch lines is not acceptable. Calculations shall be
taken back to the water supply source unless water supply data is otherwise indicated.
Calculations shall be substantiate that the design area indicated is the hydraulically most
demanding. Water supply curves and system requirements shall be plotted on semi-logarithmic
graph paper so as to present a summary of the complete hydraulic calculation. A summary sheet
listing sprinklers in the design area and their respective hydraulic reference points, elevations,
actual discharge pressures and actual flows shall be provided. Elevations of hydraulic reference
points (nodes) shall be indicated. Documentation shall identify each pipe individually and the
nodes connected thereto. The diameter, length, flow, velocity, friction loss, number and type
fittings, total friction loss in the pipe, equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams coefficient shall
be indicated for each pipe. For gridded systems, calculations shall show peaking of demand
area friction loss to verify that the hydraulically most demanding area is being used. Also for
gridded systems, a flow diagram indicating the quantity and direction of flows shall be included.
A drawing showing hydraulic reference points (nodes) and pipe designations used in the
calculations shall be included and shall be independent of shop drawings. A safety factor of 10
psi or 10 percent of the required operating pressure (whichever is greater) is mandatory.
1.05 STANDARDS
The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety:
2000 International Fire Code (IFC), with any local city amendments.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
NFPA 13
NFPA 25
NFPA 26
NFPA 70
NFPA 72
NFPA 291
Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water Based Fire Protection
Systems
Supervision of Valves Controlling Water Supplies
National Electrical Code
National Fire Alarm Code
Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Handle materials carefully so that they are protected from damage. Store sprinkler heads,
valves, and alarms inside storage buildings.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 23, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
MECHANICAL WORK.
B. The fire protection system shall include the fire main to the building, main riser, all valves,
system alarms, air compressor, piping, hangers, conduit, wiring, panels and other
appurtenances necessary for an approved complete and operable dry pipe fire sprinkler
system.
Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 13 - 2
DPR09328

2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. SPRINKLER HEADS
1. Semi-recessed pendent glass bulb, UL/FM listed with chrome white factory finished
adjustable escutcheon, and chrome sprinkler. Acceptable manufacturers and models:
Central, Model TY-B and Grinnell, Model F-972. (Office and Break Areas).
2. Standard UL/FM upright, pendent, or sidewall sprinkler with fusible link, center strut, or
glass bulb. Chrome Brass factory coated. Acceptable manufacturers and models:
Glass Bulb
Central
Grinnell
Viking
Firematic
Model TY-B
Model F980
Model "M"
Model “A”
Fusible Link
Central
Model "A" or “H”
Grinnell
Model F950
Viking
Model "M" (Fusible Link)
Firematic
Model "A" (Center Link)
B. PRESSURE GAUGES: FM approved with a maximum limit not less than twice the normal
working pressure at the point installed; dial type, liquid filled with glass view port. Provide
gauge cock with each gauge.
C. DRY PIPE VALVE: Dry Pipe Valve assembly, pilot operated valve combines an internal
diaphragm assembly that is pressurized closed with priming water, an internal check valve to
isolate the sprinkler system piping and the Differential Valve located on the valve trim that
allows the valve to operate upon loss of air pressure. Provide all trim necessary for a
complete operable system. Model Viking 4 inch Model G-4000, or approved equal
D. WATERFLOW INDICATOR: Vane-type waterflow switch with adjustable integral pneumatic
retard devices and two single pole, double throw snap action switches. UL listed, FM
approved. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Viking, Model VSR-F; Grinnell, Model
VSR-F (2"-8"), Model VS-SP (1"-1-1/2"); Potter, Model VS-SP (1"-1-1/2"), Model VSR-SP (2'-
8").
E. CONTROL VALVE SUPERVISORY SWITCH: Tamper resistant switch for monitoring the
open position of post-indicator and control values. UL/FM, 2-single pole-double throw snap
action switches enclosed in a NEMA 1 housing with damper resistant screws. Acceptable
manufacturers and models: Grinnell, Model OSYSO; Potter and Model PCVS.
2.02 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13, but in no case less than two
sprinkler heads of each type and rating.
B. Provide suitable wrenches for each size and type of head.
C. Provide a metal storage cabinet for extra heads and wrenches and install as close to the
standpipe as is practical or where directed by the Owner.
Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 13 - 3
DPR09328

3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
Coordinate work of this section with other affected work. Use reflected ceiling plans, mechanical
plans, and electrical lighting plans to avoid conflicts with lights, ducts, piping, and structure.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the sprinkler system before installing finishes, furniture, or other components which
could be damaged by water.
B. Position sprinkler heads in patterns that align transversely and longitudinally, coordinate with
lighting fixtures and ceiling diffusers, and are in line along both diagonals.
C. Position sprinkler heads a minimum of 2” from any obstruction.
D. Protect sprinkler heads which are subject to damage with sprinkler head guards. Provide wax
or lead coated sprinklers in fertilizer and chemical storage rooms.
E. Apply strippable tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler heads and concealed
head plates do not receive field paint finish. Replace any sprinkler head with field paint.
F. Route pipe to minimize obstruction to other work. Conceal all pipe above ceilings unless
indicated otherwise.
G. Provide 3/4" ball drip at low point of fire department connection and pipe to floor drain or
through exterior wall.
H. Power driven studs are prohibited as hanger supports.
I. Provide a dry sprinkler system or other approved sprinkler system, in areas subject to
freezing temperatures.
J. Provide upright pendent sprinkler heads in mechanical rooms, warehouse and equipment
rooms.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform testing required by NFPA 13 and regulatory authorities. Include the cost of such
testing in the proposal.
B. Hydrostatically test systems at not less than 200 psig for two (2) hours, or at 50 psig in
excess of the maximum static pressure when the static pressure exceeds 215 psig. Measure
hydrostatic pressure at the low point of the system being tested.
C. Prepare a Material and Test Certificate, in accordance with NFPA 13 Obtain certificates of
approval from regulatory authorities. Submit certificates in the final submittal data to the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 13 - 4
DPR09328

22 00 01 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and incidentals for complete, operable plumbing
systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Verify location, size, depth and pressure of each utility prior to beginning work. If conditions
are found that will adversely affect the installation, notify the Architect or Engineer in writing.
B. Plumbing fixtures and trim of like kind shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the
project, in the following categories:
1. Water closets, lavatories,
2. Countertop sinks
3. Electric water coolers
4. Emergency shower, eye and face washes
5. Faucets, mixing valves (other than thermostatic mixing valves)
6. Tailpiece, fixture traps, escutcheons, arm extensions, strainers
7. Fixture carriers
1.03 WATER USAGE REQUIREMENTS: WATER SAVING PERFORMANCE STANDARDS OF THE
TEXAS COMMISSION ON ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY ADOPTED DECEMBER 14, 2005,
SHALL APPLY TO EVERY FIXTURE INCLUDED HEREIN.
A. The maximum flow from a sink or lavatory faucet shall not exceed 2.20 gallons of water per
minute at 60 psig.
B. The maximum volume of water per flush from a toilet (water closet) shall not exceed 1.60
gallons (1.6 gpf)SUBMITTALS
C. Provide Submittals in accordance with Division 1, SUBMITTALS and include Manufacturer's
product data sheets for the following:
1. Plumbing fixtures and trim.
2. Piping materials and valves.
3. Equipment and accessories.
D. Operation And Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance
with Division 1.
1.04 STANDARDS
A. AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION
1. Perform all work in accordance with the regulations and ordinances of federal, state, and
local agencies, who have lawful jurisdiction over the Place of Record. Notify proper
authorities for inspections as work progresses.
B. CODES AND ORDINANCES
1. The design and installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the
following codes and ordinances. These codes and ordinances shall apply as if written
here in their entirety:
2006 International Plumbing Code (IPC), with any local city amendments.
2006 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), with any local city
amendments.
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 1
DPR09328

Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS).
Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA).
Texas Water Commission; Water Conservation Standards.
C. STANDARDS
1. The design and installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the
following standards. These standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety:
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical
Engineers (ASME).
b. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society for Testing Materials
(ASTM).
c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Welding Society (AWS).
d. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Water Works Association
(AWWA).
e. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA).
f. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications.
g. American Welding Society (AWS) Specifications.
h. American Water Works Administration (AWWA) Publications.
i. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE).
j. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) Standards.
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver and store equipment and materials in accordance with Division 1. Handle pipe in a
manner which prevents damage. Store on raised platforms or wood runners in neat piles.
Prevent debris or dirt from entering open ends of pipe.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Drawings are schematic and intended to show the general arrangement and extent of the
work. Follow dimensions without regard to scale. Determine the exact location and
arrangement of piping with regard to the actual equipment furnished, the surrounding
conditions and the work installed by other trades.
B. Review drawings and each section of the specifications. Install work indicated, regardless of
which drawing or section of the specifications it occurs. No allowances shall be made for the
Contractor's failure to review complete Contract Documents.
C. Locate by field measurement the exact rough-in and final connection location of all fixtures,
drains and plumbing. Center pipe between walls and chases.
D. Conform to the Manufacturer's rough-in and installation requirements for each fixture
equipment and appliance.
E. Perform cutting and patching required to install the work under the requirements of the
individual trade. Patching shall restore the area to the original condition. No structural
member shall be cut without the written approval of the Engineer.
F. Schedule work to avoid conflicts with other trades.
G. For pipe penetrations through metal roofs, conform to the metal roofing manufacturer’s
installation requirements.
1.07 GUARANTEES
A. In addition to the Contractor's standard one (1) year guarantee, provide the Manufacturer's
warranty for all equipment installed. Include warranties in the O & M Manual, in accordance
with Division 1, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 2
DPR09328

2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. WATER PIPING BURIED BEYOND 5'-0” OF BUILDING:
1. Copper tube for 2-1/2" diameter and greater: (ASTM B88) Type K or L hard drawn.
Fittings (ANSI/ASME B16.8) cast copper or (ANSI/ASME B16.22) wrought copper.
Joints: AWS A5.8 BCuP silver braze.
2. PVC Pressure Pipe for 3" Diameter or Less: Polyvinyl Chloride pressure pipe, schedule
40 [80] (ASTM D1785) and fittings, (ASTM D2466).
3. PVC Piping for 4" Diameter and Greater: Pipe: (AWWA C900), DR 18. Fittings:
(ANSI/AWWA C110), ductile iron, standard thickness. Joints: (ANSI/AWWA C111)
rubber gasket push-on mechanical joint.
B. WATER PIPING BURIED WITHIN 5'-0” OF BUILDING:
1. Copper Tubing: For 2" diameter and less, (ASTM B88), Type L or K or annealed.
Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast copper or ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper.
Joints: AWS A5.8 BCuP silver braze.
C. WATER PIPING ABOVE GRADE:
1. Copper Tubing: For 4" diameter and less, (ASTM B88), Type L, hard drawn. Fittings:
ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper. Joints:
(ANSI/ASTM B32), solder, (Grade 95TA) or Copper Pipe 2" through 6" may be installed
using mechanical type couplings on roll-grooved pipe; coupling housing, ductile iron
(ASTM A536) grade 65-45-12, with factory coat copper alkyd enamel paint. Gaskets,
flanges, shall be rated for the system by the manufacturer.
D. SANITARY DRAIN, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING (DWV) BURIED:
1. Cast Iron Pipe: (ASTM A74) service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot,
CISPI HSN compression type with (ASTM C564) neoprene gaskets.
2. PVC DWV Pipe: Polyvinyl Chloride, Schedule 40 (ASTM D2665) pipe, and fittings
(ASTM D2466).
3. PVC Sewer Pipe (Beyond 5'-0" of Building): Polyvinyl Chloride Gravity Sewer Pipe
(ASTM 3034) SDR 35, or (ASTM F 789) PS 46 and Fittings, with elastomeric Joints. (Uni-
Bell B-4-82, ASTM M D3212)
E. SANITARY DRAIN, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING (DWV) ABOVE GRADE:
1. Cast Iron Pipe: (ASTM A74), service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Hub-andspigot,
CISPI HSN compression type with (ASTM C564) neoprene gaskets.
2. Cast Iron Pipe: (CISPI 301), hubless, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Castiron
couplings (ASTM A48, Class 30-A) with neoprene gaskets (ASTM C-1277, ASTM
D412 18-8 and CISPI 310) stainless steel bolts and nuts; manufactured by MG Piping
Products Co. or equal.
F. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
1. Copper Tubing: For 4" diameter and less, (ASTM B88), Type L, hard drawn. Fittings:
ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper. Joints:
(ANSI/ASTM B32), solder, (Grade 95TA) or Copper Pipe 2" through 6" may be installed
using mechanical type couplings on roll-grooved pipe; coupling housing, ductile iron
(ASTM A536) grade 65-45-12, with factory coat copper alkyd enamel paint. Gaskets,
flanges, shall be rated for the system by the manufacturer.
G. COMPRESSED AIR PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
1. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast
brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade
95TA.
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 3
DPR09328

2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3
malleable iron or ASTM A234 forged steel welding type. Joints: Screwed or ANSI/AWS
D1.1 welded.
2.02 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. PIPE SIZE 2” AND UNDER: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping;
bronze unions for copper pipe, solder joints.
B. PIPE SIZE OVER 2”: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges
for copper piping.
C. DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper
solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
1.
2.03 VALVES (WITHIN 5’-0” OF BUILDING)
A. GATE VALVES
1. Gate valves 3” and less: MSS-SP-80, rated 175 lb. minimum water pressure, brass or
bronze construction screw-in bonnet, rising stem, solid wedge disc, threaded or soldered
connections. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Crane, 438, 1334; Nibco, T-111,
S-111 ITT; Grinnell, 3010, 3010SJ; Watts, B-3100 & B-3101 and Milwaukee, 148, 149.
2. Gate valves 2-1/2” and greater: MSS SP-70, rated 150 lb. minimum water pressure, iron
body construction, bronze mounted, bolted bonnet, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge
disc, flanged connections. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Watts, F-503; Crane,
465-1/2; ITT Grinnell, 6020A, Milwaukee, F-2885 and Nibco, F617-0.
B. BALL VALVES (For water shut-off and throttling)
1. Ball valves 2” and less: Full-port, rated 175 lb. minimum water, oil, air and gas pressure,
brass or bronze construction, seat material as recommended by manufacturer for
material conveying, lever handle, threaded or soldered connections. Throttling valves
shall be provided with memory stops. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Crane,
9302, 9322; ITT Grinnell, 3500, 3500SJ; Milwaukee, BA-200, BA-250; Watts, B-6000, B-
6001 and Nibco, T-580, S-580.
2. Ball valves 2-1/2” and greater: Full-port, rated 150 lb. minimum water, oil, air and gas
pressure, bronze or carbon steel construction, seat material as recommended by
manufacturer for material conveying, lever handle, flanged connections. Throttling valves
shall be provided with memory stops. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Watts, G-
4000M1; Crane, 941-TF; Apollo, 88-100 and Jamesbury, D150F.
3. CPVC and PVC Union Ball valves: 150 lb. minimum water, oil, air and gas pressure,
CPVC or PVC construction, MSS SP-122, full-port, socket or threaded detachable end
connectors, lever handle, flanged connections.
4. CPVC and PVC Non-Union Ball valves: 150 lb. minimum water, oil, air and gas pressure,
CPVC or PVC construction, MSS SP-122, full-port, socket or threaded detachable end
connectors, lever handle, flanged connections.
C. BUTTERFLY VALVES (For water shut-off and throttling)
1. Butterfly valves 2” and less: Rated 175 lb. water, oil, air and gas pressure, brass or
bronze construction, seat material as recommended by manufacturer for material
conveying, lever handle, threaded or soldered connections. Throttling valves shall be
provided with memory stops. Acceptable manufacturer and model: Watts, BF-03 and
Milwaukee, BB2-100, BB2-350.
2. Butterfly valves 2-1/2” and greater: Rated 175 lb. water pressure, wafer style, iron body
bronze disc, stainless steel stem, seat material as recommended by manufacturer for
material conveying, 10 position lever handle, for flanged connections. Throttling valves
shall be provided with memory stops. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Watts,
BF-04; Crane, 21; ITT Grinnell, 8000; De Zurik, 660 and Nibco, WL-082.
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 4
DPR09328

3. CPVC and PVC Butterfly valves: 150 lb. minimum water, oil, air and gas pressure, CPVC
or PVC construction, MSS SP-122, socket or threaded detachable end connectors, or
flanged connections, lever handle.
D. PLUG VALVES (For compressed air shut-off)
1. Plug: Plug valves 2-1/2” and greater: Rated 150 lb. minimum air pressure, cast iron
body, non-lubricated, lever handle, flanged connections. Acceptable manufacturers and
models: Dresser, X-Centric; Homestead, Ballcentric; DeZurik, Series 100 and Milliken,
Series 600.
E. CHECK VALVES (Swing check valves)
1. Check Valves 2” and less: MSS SP-80 rated 175 lb. minimum water and air pressure,
brass or bronze construction, bronze disc, threaded or soldered connections. Acceptable
manufacturers and models: Watts, B-5000 & B-5001; Nibco, T-413-B & S-413-B;
Milwaukee, 509-1509; Crane, 37/1707 & 1707S.
2. Check Valves 2-1/2” and greater: MSS SP-71 rated 150 lb. minimum water and air
pressure, iron body, brass mounted, flanged connections. Acceptable manufacturers and
models: Crane, 373; Nibco, F-918; Milwaukee, F-2974; ITT and Grinnell 6300A; Watts,
F-511.
3. CPVC and PVC Check valves: 150 lb. minimum water, oil, air and gas pressure, CPVC
or PVC construction, MSS SP-122, Swing or ball-check design, socket or threaded
detachable end connectors, or flanged connections
2.04 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Except where otherwise indicated or specified, expansion joints shall be single arch spool
type with control unit. Expansion joints shall be fabricated of synthetic elastomers and fabric
with metallic reinforcement. Joints shall be provided with split steel retaining rings. Flanges
and retaining rings shall be drilled to match standard 125 lb. ANSI B16.1.
2.05 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS AND ACCESSORIES:
A. Electric Water Heaters (Direct Fired)
1. Domestic water heater (WH): ASHRAE 90.1B-1992 energy efficient, standard or lowboy
height electric vertical type, interior-lined tank, anode protection, drain valve, safety relief
valve, high-temperature cut-off, individual operating thermostats, insulated tank, baked
enamel exterior steel jacket, and UL listed. Provide with expansion tank and heat traps as
recommended by the water heater manufacturer.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
State
P6 Series
A.O. Smith
EES or DVE Series
Rheem
81V or 81SV Series
Lochinvar
ET or ES Series
2.06 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
A. WATER CLOSETS
1. Water Closet (WC): Accessible floor-mounted, flush-valve type bottom outlet, white
vitreous china, siphon-jet action, elongated bowl, 1-1/2” top inlet spud and designed to
operate on 1.6 gallons per flush maximum (Mounting height + 17” from finished floor to
rim). Acceptable manufacturers and models: American Standard, 3043.102; Eljer, 111-
4815; Crane 3-H701E; Universal-Rundle, 4375; Briggs 7790; Toto, CT705L; Kohler, K-
4302; Zurn, Z5660.
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 5
DPR09328

B. FLUSH-VALVES FOR WATER CLOSETS
1. Flush-Valve For Water Closets; Exposed type, chrome-plated, 1” supply inlet, screw
driver back-check angle stop, vacuum breaker, lever activating handle, solid ring pipe
support 1-1/2” top outlet spud with wall and spud flanges. Inlet of flush-valve shall be
11.1/2” maximum, above rim of water closet, coordinate flush valve location with grab
bars for accessible installations. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Sloan, Royal
III; Delany, 402-1.6 and Zurn, Z-6000-AV-WS-1.
C. SEATS FOR WATER CLOSETS:
1. Seat for Water Closets (WC): White, posture molded, elongated type, open front, extra
heavy construction, concealed check stainless steel hinges, and rubber bumpers.
Provide with antimicrobial agent option. Acceptable manufacturers and models:
Olsonite, 10CC; Church/Bemis, 1955C; Beneke, 527 or 533 and Kohler, K-4680-CA
series.
D. LAVATORIES
1. Lavatory (L1): Wall-mounted, white vitreous china, size 20” x 18”, holes for concealed
arms, front overflow, integral back, soap depression, and 8” center holes. Acceptable
manufacturers and models: American Standard, 0356.015; Eljer, 051-1848; Crane, 1-
412-S; Briggs, 6622; Zurn, Z5348; Kohler, K-2006.
E. FAUCETS FOR LAVATORIES
1. Faucet for Lavatories: Chrome-plated brass, 8” centers, soft flow vandal proof spout,
with chrome-plated brass wrist blades handles. Maximum flow is 2.20 GPM. Acceptable
manufacturers and models: Chicago Faucet, 404; T & S Brass, B-2680; Royal Brass, 41-
070-BH.4; Speakman, SC-3041-D75-LD and American Standard, 6500.000 with .102 H
Cross or .142 H Lever Handles; Kohler, K7443-3A – (4 Arm Handle), Cambridge/Delta
23T343; Symmons, S-244-LWG and Zurn, 831R4.
F. SUPPLIES AND STOPS FOR LAVATORIES
1. Supply and Stop for Lavatories: Supplied through the wall, chrome-plated cast brass
stop, 1/2” female standard pipe thread inlet by 3/8” O.D. compression type outlet angle
stop, wheel or four armed handle, 3/8” O.D. chrome-plated copper flexible riser, and wall
escutcheon. Acceptable manufacturers and models: McGuire, 2165LK; Eljer, American
Standard, Cambridge/Delta, Zurn and Engineered Brass (Just).
G. STRAINER AND TAILPIECE FOR LAVATORIES
1. Offset Strainer for Lavatories: 17 gauge chrome plated wheelchair strainer and tailpiece,
cast grid drain plug with strainer. Acceptable manufacturers and models: McGuire,
155WC;, Eljer, American Standard, Crane, Cambridge/Delta, Zurn and Engineered Brass
(Just).
H. P-TRAP FOR LAVATORIES
1. P-Trap for Lavatories: 17 gauge chrome-plated brass size 1-1/4”, integral cleanout, and
wall escutcheon. Acceptable manufacturers and models: McGuire, B8872; Eljer,
American Standard, Crane, Cambridge/Delta, Zurn and Engineered Brass (Just).
I. LAVATORY INSULATION KITS
1. Lavatory Insulation Kits: Fully molded closed cell vinyl insulation 3/16” thick with nylon
fasteners. K factor of 1.17 (ASTM C-177) self extinguishing burn characteristics (ASTM
D635). Insulation kit for p-trap, tailpiece, trap arm, hot and cold water supplies, white.
Acceptable manufacturers and models: Truebro Inc., #102 with accessory #105; Brocar
Products Inc., Plumberex, and TCI Products.
J. LAVATORY CARRIERS
1. Carrier for wall-mounted Lavatories mounted on walls other than concrete block: Wall
and floor supported type, compatible with specified lavatory, complete with adjustable
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 6
DPR09328

through the wall frame including steel uprights, block foot supports, concealed arms, and
accessories. Verify that base plate for carrier specified will fit within wall space provided.
Acceptable manufacturers and models: Zurn, Z-1231 or Z-1231-D Series (3” deep base
plates); Jay R. Smith, 700 Series (4” deep base plates); Tyler/Wade, W520 (4 ¼” deep
base plates) and Josam, 17100 & 17105 Series (4” deep base plates); Josam, 17570
(For corner lavatory); Mifab, MC-31-C.
K. SINKS
1. Sink: Countertop mounted, single compartment, 18-gauge stainless steel, self rimming,
faucet deck, with three (3) 1-1/2” diameter holes, 4” centers, with undercoated underside.
Size 25” x 21-1/4” x 5-3/8” deep. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Elkay, LRAD
2521 (or 2521L) and Just, SL-ADA-2125-A-GR -L or R.
L. FAUCETS FOR SINKS
1. Faucets for Sinks): Chrome-plated brass, deck mount, 8” centers, swing gooseneck soft
flow spout with 8”-9” reach (centerline of spout inlet to centerline of spout outlet), and
chrome-plated brass 4” wrist blade handles. Maximum flow is 2.20 GPM. Acceptable
manufacturers and models: Chicago Faucet, 201-GN8A-E3-317; T & S Brass, B-2867-
00(B-WH-4); Royal Brass, 401-G98-AW; Speakman, SC-3004-8-LD; American Standard,
7230.000 with .372H handles, Cambridge/Delta 27T2944 with 76860-5 spout and Zurn,
Z-831B4.
M. SUPPLIES AND STOPS FOR SINKS
1. Supply and Stop for Sinks: Supplied through the wall, chrome-plated cast brass stop,
1/2” female standard pipe thread inlet by 3/8” O.D. compression type outlet angle stop,
wheel or four armed handle, 3/8” O.D. chrome-plated copper flexible riser, and wall
escutcheon. Acceptable manufacturers and models: McGuire, 2165LK; Eljer, American
Standard, Cambridge/Delta, Zurn and Engineered Brass (Just).
N. STRAINER AND TAILPIECE FOR SINKS
1. Offset Strainer for Sinks (S_ & S _): 17 gauge chrome plated wheelchair strainer and
tailpiece, cast grid drain plug with strainer. Acceptable manufacturers and models:
McGuire, 1149WC or PW1149WC (includes pre-wrapped insulation); Eljer, American
Standard, Crane, Cambridge/Delta, Zurn and Engineered Brass (Just).
2. 1A and Orion, WA Series.
O. P-TRAPS FOR SINKS
1. P-Trap for Sinks): Chrome-plated, 17 gauge cast brass, size 1-1/2”, with integral
cleanout, and wall escutcheon. Acceptable manufacturers and models: McGuire,
B8912; Eljer, American Standard, Crane, Cambridge/Delta, Zurn and Engineered Brass
(Just).
P. INSULATION KIT FOR ACCESSIBLE SINKS
1. Sink Insulation Kits: Fully molded closed cell vinyl insulation 3/16” thick with nylon
fasteners. K factor of 1.17 (ASTM C-177) self extinguishing burn characteristics (ASTM
D635). Insulation kit for p-trap, tailpiece, trap arm, hot and cold water supplies, white.
Acceptable manufacturers and models: Truebro Inc., #102 with accessory #105; Brocar
Products Inc., Plumberex, TCI Products. Insulation kit is not required if a trap/supplies
enclosure is provided under another division.
Q. ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
1. Electric Water Cooler (EWC1): Wall-mounted, bi-level, wheelchair type, front and sides
push bars, stainless steel top, stainless steel cabinet with a flexible hooded bubbler.
Wheelchair unit shall be mounted up +36” to top of bubbler. Water cooler shall deliver
7.5 GPH minimum of 50°F water, based upon 80°F inlet water temperature and 90°F
ambient air temperature. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Elkay, EZSTL-8C;
Haws, HWUACO8L; Halsey Taylor, HAC8FSBL-Q; Oasis, PR8ACSL; Acorn A112108F
and Sunroc, ADA-D8-BL. Provide with optional apron mounted to bottom of higher unit.
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 7
DPR09328

R. SUPPLIES AND STOPS FOR ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
1. Supply and Stop for Electric Water Coolers (EWC_ & EWC_): Supplied through the wall,
chrome-plated brass, 1/2” female standard pipe thread inlet by 3/8” O.D. compression
type outlet angle stop, wheel or four-armed handle, with flexible riser and wall
escutcheon. . Acceptable manufacturers and models: McGuire, 2166LK; Eljer, American
Standard, Cambridge/Delta, Zurn and Engineered Brass (Just).
S. P-TRAP FOR ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
1. P-Trap for Electrical Water Coolers (EWC_ & EWC_): 17 gauge chrome-plated brass,
size 1-1/4”, integral cleanout, and wall escutcheons. Acceptable manufacturers and
models: McGuire, B8912; Eljer, American Standard, Cambridge/Delta, Zurn and
Engineered Brass (Just).
T. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER CARRIERS
1. Carriers for Electric Water Coolers Mounted on Concrete Block Walls or Walls other than
Concrete Block: Wall and floor supported type, compatible with specified electric water
cooler, complete with adjustable through the wall frame including top and bottom hanger
plates, steel uprights, and block foot supports, and accessories. Acceptable
manufacturers and models: Josam, 17900; Jay R. Smith, 830; Tyler/Wade, W400-AM11;
HAWS, 6800; MC-33 (Bi-Level type); and Zurn, Z-1225.
U. EMERGENCYEYEWASH UNITS
1. Emergency eyewash unit: Exposed type with floor flange, all stainless steel construction,
large stainless steel bowl and two soft stream heads actuated by stay open ball valve
with push-flag. Pipe sizes shall be 1/2” water inlet and 1-1/4” drain. Provide Hot and Cold
water temperature mixing valve. Acceptable manufacturers: Speakman, Haws, Guardian
and Bradley.
V. SERVICE SINKS
1. Service Sink (SSK1): Floor-mounted, molded polyester or fiberglass material, size 24” x
24” x 10”, 3” drain, with mop hanger, hose and hose bracket, vinyl bumperguard,
removable combination dome strainer and stainless steel lint basket, and black on white
marbleized color. Acceptable manufacturers and models: Florestone, MSR-2424;
Florestone, (Hose & Bracket), MR-370; Florestone (Mop Hanger), MR-372; Florestone
(Wall Guard), MR-377 (24”); Fiat (Basin), MSB 2424; Fiat (Hose & Bracket), 832-AA; Fiat
(Mop Hanger), 889-CC; Fiat (Wall Guard), MSG 2424; Mustee (Basin) 63; Mustee (Hose
& Bracket), 65.700; Mustee (Mop Hanger), 65.600; Swan (Basin), MS-2424; Swan (Hose
& Bracket), MS-2405, Swan (Mop Hanger), MS 2437; Stern/Williams (Basin), MTB-2424;
Stern/Williams (Hose & Bracket) T-35, Stern/Williams (Mop Hanger), T-40 and Zurn 1996
(24 x 24) with accessories.
W. FLOOR DRAINS
1. Floor drain (FD) (For use in Finished Floors without square tile): ANSI A112.21.1; cast
iron body, double drainage flange, weepholes, bottom outlet, vandal proof secured 6" dia.
nickel bronze adjustable flat strainer, and non-puncturing flashing collar. Provide with trap
primer connection adapter if trap primers are used for the floor drain.
X. TRENCH DRAINS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Josam Series 30000-6A
Jay R. Smith Series 2005 or 2010
Wade Series W-1100
Zurn Series Z-415
Mifab Series F-1100
1. Trench drain (TD): Modular precast polymer concrete, sloped or neutral, interlocking
channels with positive seal, tongue and groove interlocking joints. Channels shall be
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 8
DPR09328

presloped with a minimum .06% slope and shall incorporate either polyester or vinylester
resins and formulated aggregate, with recesses for grating lockdown devices, directional
flow arrows and manufacturer’s channel identification molded into the channel walls.
Recesses shall be formed from the same material as the channel.
a. Grates to be heavy duty, class D rated, secured to channels with grate lock down
devices positioned in recesses provided in channel.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Jay R. Smith
9818, 9816, or 9814 Series
Zurn
Z-886 Series
ACO
K100, S100, or NW100 Series
Polydrain
510, 520, or 530 Series
Y. CLEANOUTS
1. Floor Cleanout (FCO) (For Use in Finished Floors): Cast iron body, adjustable type,
inside caulk connection, vandal proof secured, standard round nickel bronze top,
threaded brass plug.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Josam Series 56000
Jay R. Smith
Series 4128-NB
Wade Series W-6000
Zurn
Series Z-1405-2
Mifab Series C-1100
2. Wall Cleanout (WCO): Recessed wall type, cast iron body with threaded brass plug,
flush mounted stainless steel access cover with countersunk center screw and vandal
proof secured.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Josam Series 58710
Jay R. Smith Series 4402
Wade
Series W-8450-R
Zurn
Series ZN-1440-1
Mifab Series C-1400
3. Plug Cleanout (PCO): Cast iron body with threaded brass plug, specify with no access
cover.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Josam
Series 58710, Less cover
Jay R. Smith
Series 4402, Less cover
Wade
Series W-8450-R, Less cover
Zurn
Series ZN-1440, Less cover
4. Grade Cleanout (GCO & DGCO): Cast iron body, with straight body for caulking into soil
pipe hub with countersunk tapered threaded bronze plug. Provide "T" handle wrench.
Double Grade Cleanouts (DGCO) will require two GCO’s as described above, along with
the proper two-way cleanout pipe fitting.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Josam Series 58850-22
Jay R. Smith Series 4338
Wade Series W-8530
Zurn Series Z-1450
Mifab Series C-1300
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 9
DPR09328

Z. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
1. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers (RPBFP):
a. Reduced pressure backflow preventer (2-1/2" thru 8” or 10”): ANSI/ASSE 1013;
complete unit of two independently acting check valves together with an
automatically operating pressure relief valve, two gate valves, and four test cocks,
bronze or iron body with bronze internal parts, 150 psi working pressure, and shall
comply with AWWA Standard C506.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Cla-Val Co.
RP-1 (2” & larger)
Watts 909
Hersey
6CM
Febco 825
Wilkins 375
AMES
Silver Bullet – 4000 SS
b. Reduced pressure backflow preventer (2” and smaller): ANSI/ASSE 1013; complete
unit of two independently acting check valves together with an automatically
operating pressure relief valve, two ball valves, strainer, and four test cocks, bronze
or iron body with bronze internal parts, 150 psi working pressure, and shall comply
with AWWA Standard C506.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Cla-Val Co.
RP-2 (1-1/2” & smaller)
Watts
009QT & 995QT
Hersey
FRP-II
Febco
825Y
Wilkins
975XL
AA. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
1. Water Hammer Arrestors (WHA): ANSI A112.26.1, ASSE 1010, and PDI WH-201;
permanently sealed bellows or expanding chamber. Sizing designations indicated on
drawings are standard classifications established by Plumbing and Drainage Institute
"Standard PDI-WH201". Verify that system pressure meets minimum required for water
hammer arrestor provided.
BB. TRAP PRIMERS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Josam 75000
Jay R. Smith 5000
Wade
"SHOKSTOP" Series
Zurn Z-1700
Sioux Chief
"Hydra-Rester" Series
Watts
No. 15 Series
PPP
SC & SWA Series
Mifab
WHB Series
1. Trap Guard (TG): Smooth, flexible elastomerictrap seal device utilizes a normally closed
seal to prevent evaporation of the liquid trap seal and also protects against sewer gases
from backing up into the building or surrounding areas. The device opens when liquid
enters to allow drainage to flow through into the building drainage piping, and closes
when there is no drainage flow entering the drain. Provide on all floor, sink, and hub
drains connected to the sanitary sewer system or to other systems that may have sewer
gases present in the drainage system. The device must be selected and installed in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the requirements of the applicable
codes.
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 10
DPR09328

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
ProVent Systems, Inc. ProSet Trap Guard. 800.262.5355
or
www.trapguard.com
CC. HOSE BIBBS
1. Hose bibb (HB): Chrome plated brass, provided with wall flange, 1/2" female N.P.T. inlet
by 3/4" male N.H.T. outlet, with chrome plated vacuum breaker in conformance with
ANSI/ASSE 1011.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Chicago Faucet 15-E27 or 7-E27
T&S Brass
B-702-B-972
Royal Brass
5115-136-G
Woodford
24P
DD. WALL HYDRANTS
1. Non-freeze wall hydrant (NFWH): ANSI/ASSE 1019; exposed wall hydrant type, with
chrome plated brass or nickel bronze finish on brass castings, freezeless, 3/4" hose
thread nozzle, integral vacuum breaker, and loose key handle.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Woodford 65
Josam 71050
Jay R. Smith 5609
Wade W-8620
Zurn Z-1310
EE. HEAT TRACING SYSTEMS
1. Freeze Protection System
a. Heat tracing: Automatic self-regulating, UL listed, with tinned copper braid, able to
crossover itself without overheating, parallel circuit design, able to be cut to length at
job site, flat and flexible for easy installation, corrosion and chemical resistant,
complete with power connection kits, splice kits, tee kits, end seal kits and necessary
accessories for a complete operating installation. Provide pipe insulation for all
piping requiring heat tracing. Verify with the heat trace manufacturer that the
temperature rating of the piping will handle the heat trace temperature provided.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Hevi-Duty/Nelson
Raychem
Thermon
b. Hot Water Temperature Maintenance System
Heat tracing: Automatic self-regulating, UL listed, with tinned copper braid, able to
crossover itself without overheating, parallel circuit design, able to be cut to length at
job site, flat and flexible for easy installation and corrosion and chemical resistant.
Heat tracing shall maintain hot water temperature at 105°F. Heat tracing shall be
complete with power connection kits, splice kits, tee kits, end seal kits and necessary
accessories for a complete operating installation. Install per manufacturers
instructions. Provide pipe insulation for all piping requiring heat tracing. Verify with
the heat trace manufacturer that the temperature rating of the piping will handle the
heat trace temperature provided.
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 11
DPR09328

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Raychem
Hevi-Duty/Nelson
Thermon
2. SUBMITTALS
a. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished
specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated.
1) Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power
requirement for each electric heating cable required.
b. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable. Include plans, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1) Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
c. Field quality-control test reports.
d. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation
and maintenance manuals.
FF. OIL/WATER SEPARATORS
1. Oil/water Separator Performance:
a. Oil/water separator shall be designed to intercept intermittent and variable flows of
water, oil or any combination of non-emulsified oil-water mixtures ranging from zero
to the value indicated as maximum flow rate scheduled on drawing. Operating
temperature of the influent oil in the water mixture shall range from 40°F to 100°F.
The specific gravities of the oils at operating temperatures shall range from 0.70 to
0.95 and the petroleum hydrocarbon concentration less than or equal to 200,000
ppm. The specific gravity of the fresh water at operating temperatures shall range
from 1.00 to 1.03. The effluent from the separator shall not exceed 100 ppm of
petroleum hydrocarbon free concentration.
b. Oil/water separator shall be Corten Type I steel, epoxy coated inside and outside or
standard steel conforming to UL 58 and STI-P3 specifications. Standard steel
constructed separator shall be provided with a cathodically protected and coated
corrosion control system in accordance with STI-P3 specifications. Manufacturers of
standard steel separator must be a licensee of Steel Tank Institute. "Corten" steel
separators do not require a corrosion control system unless manufacturer feels
necessary to meet the warranty specified herein.
c. Separator shall be designed with integral oil holding capacity as scheduled on the
drawing. Separator shall be constructed with a double wall, designed to contain any
leak due to rupture of the separator or integral oil holding tank.
d. Separator shall be provided with the accessories necessary for a complete operating
system including anchoring system, oil and sediment removal filters, integral
extension to allow top of separator or man ways to be flush with finished grade.
e. Top of separator or man way covers shall be designed for H-20 heavy traffic loading.
Maximum size of access door, or shall be 3'-0" x 3'-0". It may be necessary to
provide multiple access doors. Each door shall be provided with lifting ring.
f. Separators shall be warranted for 30 years from the date of shipment against internal
and external corrosion.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
Rockford Sanitary Systems OS Series
Highland Tank and Mfg. Co. HT Series
Mifab
MI-O Series
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 12
DPR09328

V. SAND AND SOILDS INTERCEPTORS
1. Sand Trap (ST1): Steel epoxy coated inside and outside, recessed exterior type, 100
gallon liquid holding capacity, internal air relief, double wall trap, removable filter,
gasketed cover, and Opex Shop coating inside and bituminous coating outside.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER AND MODEL
Rockford
Series SD-48
W. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon
steel, adjustable, clevis.
3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll,
double hanger.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast
iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
6. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable
pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
7. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll stand, steel
screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
8. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
9. Shields for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over
insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
10. Shields for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe
covering protective saddles.
11. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block nonconducting
saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness
same as insulation thickness.
12. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
13. Support horizontal piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER
1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 6'-6" 3/8"
1-1/2 to 2 inch 10'-0" 3/8"
2-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 1/2"
4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 5/8"
8 to 12 inch 14'-0" 7/8"
14 inch and Over 20'-0" 1"
PVC (All Sizes) 6'-0" 3/8"
C.I. Bell and Spigot (or No-Hub) 5'-0" and at Joints
14. Hanger Notes:
a. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
b. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
c. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch maximum vertical adjustment.
d. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing
between hangers.
e. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at
hub.
Plumbing Systems 22 00 01 - 13
DPR09328

f. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers. Consult with project structural engineer for approval.
g. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
h. For below floor hanger installations, place one hanger at each pipe penetration thru a
concrete grade beam, at either side, a minimum of 12 inches from the face of the
grade beam.
X. HANGER RODS
1. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends.
Y. INSERTS
1. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to
forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
Z. INSULATION
1. Pipe insulation for domestic hot and cold water pipe, roof drains and horizontal roof drain
pipe.
a. Heavy duty preformed fiberglass (ASTM C 547, type 1, 2 or 3). Schuller, Knauf or
Certainteed.
b. Preformed flexible elastomeric insulation (ASTM C 534) Armstrong “Armaflex”, or
Schuller “Rubatex”.
c. Preformed unicellular polyolefin foam (ASTM C534) tubular preslit with adhesive.
IMCOA.
INSULATION SCHEDULE
Cold Water
Hot Water
1" thick up to 2" pipe size
1-1/2" thick over 2" pipe size
1" thick up to 2" pipe size
1-1/2" thick over 2" pipe size
d. Provide all purpose jacket, high density white kraft bonded to aluminum foil,
reinforced with fiberglass yarn lap and butt, self sealing, pressure sensitive. Schuller
“Micro-Lok”, Certainteed “Snap-On”.
e. PVC fitting covers, one piece pre molded high impact PVC white gloss insulating
fitting covers and jackets. Schuller “Zeston 2000PVC”.
2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to
those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket
materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
a. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 50 or less.
b. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smokedeveloped
rating of 150 or less.
AA. PIPING IDENTIFICATION
1. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with
flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.
a. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pre-tensioned pipe
markers. Use size to match pipe and ensure a tight fit.
b. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers.
Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
c. Locate pipe markers and color bands on piping as follows: Near each valve and
control device; Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs; Where flow
Plumbing Systems 15400-14
DPR09328

3.00 EXECUTION
pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch; At other points of origination and
termination; Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run; Reduce
intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Establish invert elevations for drainage piping within 5’-0” of building. Minimum slopes for
drainage pipe is 1/4" per foot for 2 1/2-inch diameter and less and 1/8 inch per foot for 3"
diameter pipe and greater.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. PIPE, VALVES AND FITTINGS
1. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
2. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings.
3. Provide access doors where valves and equipment are not accessible. Coordinate size
and location of access doors with applicable Section.
4. Install sanitary piping true to line with proper grading. Connect horizontal branches to
one another with 45 degrees "Y" fittings, combination "Y" and 1/8 bend fittings. Connect
horizontal lines to vertical stacks using 45 degrees "Y" branches, 60 degree "Y"
branches, or combination "Y" and 1/8 bend fittings. Horizontal branches turning down to
vertical stacks may use a short sweep or 1/2 bend. Branches connecting to mains or to
other branches shall enter the branch line at a 45 degree angle, tilted 45 degrees
upward, so that the entry is from the side and top.
5. Trap primer piping shall slope to floor drain at no less than 1/16-inch per foot. Horizontal
trap primer piping shall run below concrete floor slab. Horizontal Piping within concrete
slab is not permitted.
6. Materials exposed within ducts or plenums (ceiling spaces used as supply or return air
plenums) shall have a flame-spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-developed
rating of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with the test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Materials, UBC Standard. Wrap or enclose with rated materials, any
CPVC, PVC or PEX piping installed in rated spaces, including return air plenums.
7. Piping hangers shall be sized large enough to allow insulation to pass through. Hangers
for piping 2-1/2" and greater shall be provided with pipe covering protection saddle, or
high compressive strength insulation saddle. Hangers for piping 2" and less shall be
provided with pipe covering shields. On cold water piping provide vapor barrier through
hanger.
8. Anchor piping with regard to the transmission of vibration and noise. Securely anchor
copper piping to studs or wood blocking with "C" clamp of proper size for piping. At each
fixture location where the piping penetrates the partition, back the elbow inside the
partition, or chase, with wood blocking. Anchor with "C" clamps or cast brass drop ear
elbows to prevent movement. Do not use wire as an anchoring device.
9. Piping shall not come into direct contact with metal studs, beams, or other construction
elements. Provide a non-metallic separation between dissimilar metals when copper
piping is installed in direct contact with steel.
10. Install unions in piping 2” and smaller and flanges in piping 2 ½” and larger, adjacent to
each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe
connection.
11. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
12. Install piping free of sags and bends.
B. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND EQUIPMENT
1. Pipe relief valves and drains to nearest floor drain. Minimum slope 1/16” per foot.
Provide 1" air gap.
Plumbing Systems 15400-15
DPR09328

2. Install equipment plumb and square to wall on a 4-inch thick (minimum) reinforced
concrete housekeeping pad.
3. Provide all interconnecting electrical power and control wiring from control panels to
equipment and accessories for a complete operable systems. All exposed wiring shall be
in conduit. Comply with Division 26, ELECTRICAL.
4. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage
system.
5. Encase grade cleanouts in concrete flush with grade when not located in concrete,
pavement, sidewalk, etc.
6. Grade cleanouts located in pavement or sidewalks shall have a brass or cast iron cover
that extends to grade and a brass cap shall be installed.
7. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.
8. Install floor and area drains with top depressed 1/2-inch below finished floor elevation.
9. In addition to cleanouts, as shown on the drawings, Contractor shall provide any
additional cleanouts required by local codes and ordinances at no additional cost to the
Owner.
10. Outlet of plumbing vents and flues shall be located a minimum of 25'-0" from fresh air
intakes. Provide offset as required.
11. Relief valve discharge drain from reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be piped
full outlet size down to nearest floor drain. Drain line shall terminate above floor drain
with air gap unless otherwise indicated on plans.
12. Prior to ordering and installing water hammer arrestors, verify that the pressure at the
point of installation does not drop to below 30 psig at any time. If the pressure drops
below 30 psig, do not install piston type water hammer arrestors. Install bellows type
arrestors under low pressure circumstances. Provide access panel directly in front of
each water hammer arrestor.
C. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND CONNECTIONS
1. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures, as noted on the drawings. Each fixture shall be
complete with trim and fittings, including traps and supply fittings. Set fixture with close
tolerance to wall and floor surfaces.
2. Provide all wall mounted fixtures with floor carriers. Install and secure fixtures in place
with wall supports carriers and bolts. Exposed bolts, nuts, etc. shall be stainless steel or
chrome-plated brass.
3. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with white mildew resistant sealant.
4. Mount fixtures to Architectural drawings interior wall elevations, manufacturers
recommended elevations or the requirements of the TAS.
5. Provide removable insulation covering on stops and supplies and drains and P-traps on
all handicapped lavatories. All lavatories in rooms with handicapped water closets are
considered handicapped lavatories.
6. Provide accessible stops on all water supplies to fixtures and equipment.
7. Provide accessible water hammer arresters on hot and cold water supplies to plumbing
fixtures and/or fixture groups in accordance with Standard PDI-WH-201. Water hammer
arresters shall be as shown on diagrams and if not shown, provide for plumbing fixtures
and/or fixture groups in accordance with Standard PDI-WH-201.
8. Provide drainage and vent piping run-outs to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved
trap, of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by the governing Plumbing
Code.
D. TRENCHING, EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
1. Perform excavating and backfilling necessary for the installation of work. Shore, bail,
pump and maintain all trenches dry until the work is completed. Keep trenches open until
piping has been inspected, tested and approved. Take necessary precautions to protect
Plumbing Systems 15400-16
DPR09328

the public from open trenches. Erect and maintain barricades and warning devices in
accordance with OSHA requirements.
2. Backfill trenches after piping has been tested and approved. Material for backfilling shall
be a clean, sandy loam up to 4" above the top of pipe. Above that point, use overburden
removed in the excavation process. Overburden shall be free of trash, debris, rocks or
boulders. Deposit backfill material in 12" layers and compact to the density of the
adjacent, undisturbed soil. Remove all excess material from the site.
3.03 TESTING
A. PIPING SYSTEMS
1. General: Furnish pumps, compressors, gauges, equipment and personnel required, and
test as necessary to demonstrate the integrity of the finished installation.
2. Soil, Sanitary Waste and Vent: Unless otherwise directed by the authority having
jurisdiction, plug all openings except for the highest opening and fill with water to the
point of overflow. Perform a water test consisting of no less than ten feet of head shall be
applied to the system. Allow to stand one hour or longer as required. The system should
be water tight and leak free. If leaks exist, repair and retest.
3. Water: Unless otherwise directed by the authority having jurisdiction, hydrostatically test
and make tight the entire system at 120 psi. Retain for four hours. The system should be
water tight and leak free. If leaks exist, repair and retest.
4. Compressed Air: Unless otherwise directed by the authority having jurisdiction,
pneumatically test and make tight at 1-1/2 times the normal operating pressure and not
less than 50 psi. Where the test pressure exceeds 125 psi, the test pressure shall not
exceed a value that produces a hoop stress in the piping greater than 50 percent of the
specified minimum yield strength of the pipe. Reduce test pressure if required. Retain for
four hours minimum or not less than ½ hour for each 500 cubic feet of pipe volume or
fraction thereof. When testing a system having a volume of less than 10 cubic feet, the
test duration shall be permitted to be reduced to 10 minutes. For piping systems having
a volume of more than 24,000 cubic feet, the duration of the test shall not be required
The system should be air tight and leak free. If leaks exist, repair and retest. Verify
capacities and pressure ratings of service regulators and meters. Verify correct pressure
settings for service regulators.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Prior to final acceptance, Contractor and Manufacturer's Representative of Domestic Water
Heaters and associated accessories and controls, each shall provide a minimum of 4 hours
(or as long as required by the Owner) to demonstrate to the Owner the proper operation of
the equipment.
B. Prior to final acceptance, Contractor shall provide a minimum of 4 hours (or as long as
required by the Owner) to demonstrate to the Owner the proper operation of all the plumbing
equipment and associated accessories and controls.
3.05 FLUSHING
A. General: After piping systems have been tested and approved, systems shall be flushed.
Furnished compressors, pumps, equipment, personnel, etc. required to flush piping systems.
B. Soil, Sanitary Waste and Vent, storm drainage: Unless otherwise directed by the authority
having jurisdiction, thoroughly flush piping systems with water until free of debris, or
detrimental materials that may cause partial or full blockage. As a minimum comply with the
International Plumbing Code, Section 302, of the latest edition.
C. Water Piping: Unless otherwise directed by the authority having jurisdiction, flush piping with
water until water flows clear for a minimum of 60 seconds per 100 linear feet of piping being
flushed at a velocity of 9 feet per second.
Plumbing Systems 15400-17
DPR09328

D. Compressed Air Piping: Unless otherwise directed by the authority having jurisdiction, flush
piping with air until air flows clear for a minimum of 60 seconds per 100 linear feet of piping
being flushed at 25 CFM per 1 inch diameter of pipe.
E. All strainers and filters shall be cleaned and replaced prior to start-up.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to
obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
C. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 5
remote outlets.
D. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
E. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
F. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 remote outlets and from water
entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601.
G. Disinfection and disinfection procedures shall be witnessed and approved by the Owners
Representative.
H. After disinfection is completed, submit "Disinfection Certificate of Approval" for domestic
water piping systems to the Owners Representative stating that all test results are
satisfactory. Certificate of Approval must be signed by Contractor, Testing Laboratory.
Certificate shall show the date, time and residual of each of the following tests:
1. Initial disinfection residual (50 PPM minimum) - 5 samples.
2. Final disinfection residual (25 PPM minimum) - 5 samples.
3. After flushing residual (5 PPM maximum) - 5 samples.
4. Analyze in accordance AWWA C601 - 5 samples.
3.07 CLOSING IN UNINSPECTED WORK
Do not cover up or enclose work until it has been properly and completely inspected and
approved. Should any of the work be covered up or enclosed prior to all required inspections and
approvals, uncover the work as required. After it has been completely inspected and approved,
make all repairs and replacements as necessary to the satisfaction of the Owner’s representative.
Repairs and replacements shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Plumbing Systems 15400-18
DPR09328

23 00 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.03 DEFINITIONS
1. Transition fittings.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
3. Sleeves.
4. Grout.
5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
6. Painting and finishing.
7. Supports and anchorages.
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact
by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 00 00 - 1
DPR09328

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics
may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing; connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified; and all
is provided at no additional cost. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris,
and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division
8.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
2.02 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, non-metallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 00 00 - 2
DPR09328

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.03 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
2.04 SLEEVES
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates
to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 00 00 - 3
DPR09328

2.05 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and non-metallic, dry hydraulic-cement
grout.
3.00 EXECUTION
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous,
and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to
other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.02 PAINTING
A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 section
“Painting.”
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials
and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.03 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section for miscellaneous metal fabrications and structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.04 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 00 00 - 4
DPR09328

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 00 00 - 5
DPR09328

23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment markers.
3. Duct markers.
4. Stencils.
5. Warning tags.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems,"
for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices
for piping.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces
where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on
equipment.
1. Data:
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
c. Labels of tested compliances.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2. Data:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
Mechanical Identification 23 05 53 - 1
DPR09328

d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2
by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
2.02 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow
and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
2.03 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter
height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for
access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational
instructions.
1. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel or acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated.
Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
2. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel or acrylic enamel in colors according to
ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card
stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm).
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
OPERATE.
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
option.
3.02 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where
not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible.
B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be
omitted if both are indicated.
1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm),
and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering
two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
Mechanical Identification 23 05 53 - 2
DPR09328

2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.
3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general
categories of equipment:
a. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
b. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
c. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
d. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
3.03 DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:
1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts.
2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
5. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm),
and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering
two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
B. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may
be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger
than 1 inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal
location of required identification.
C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals
of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable
ceiling system.
3.04 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked
by other work.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION
Mechanical Identification 23 05 53 - 3
DPR09328

23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.
3. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
4. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section,
on approved forms certified by TAB firm.
B. Warranties specified in this Section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,” as applicable.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with
Owner's operations.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment
to support and assist TAB activities.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily
completed.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 - 1
DPR09328

1.06 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: If AABC, provide a guarantee on AABC's "National
Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems"
forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if
TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
B. Special Guarantee: If NEBB, provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist
in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flowcontrol
devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices
are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1.
D. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired
or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate
system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed
under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance
tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found
in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems-
-Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
F. Examine system and equipment test reports.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 - 2
DPR09328

G. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves
and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.
I. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
K. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
L. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
M. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
N. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed
and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume
terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different
from indicated values.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 - 3
DPR09328

5. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems,” as applicable, and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing,
close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this
Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification
material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speedcontrol
levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended
testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaustair
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.05 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed
by fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 - 4
DPR09328

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream
from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that
houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop
unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated
system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective
action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from Owners Representative for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower
than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes at no additional cost.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume
dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the
total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust
submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions
and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances
of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract
Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.06 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 - 5
DPR09328

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,
and nameplate data.
3.07 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record compressor data.
3.08 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
B. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.09 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive
eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 - 6
DPR09328

3.10 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: plus or minus 10 percent.
3.12 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in
three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 - 7
DPR09328

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect/Engineer’s name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced
conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 - 8
DPR09328

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer
and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 - 9
DPR09328

23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semi-rigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating
cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied,
if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials,
sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates
of tests.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau
of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer
and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating
of 50 or less.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 1
DPR09328

1.07 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: 0.75 lb/ft 3 , glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket
manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. (ASTM C553,
Type V for operating temperatures higher than 850 deg F (454 deg C)).
2.03 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270 g/sq. m).
1. Tape Width: 4 inches (100 mm).
B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless
steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge
welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb (45 kg) for direct pull perpendicular to the attached
surface.
E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface
temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
100 lb (45 kg) for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 2
DPR09328

F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation
thickness indicated.
2.04 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible
with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
3.03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length
of ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity,
unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 3
DPR09328

K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation
to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vaporretarder
mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward
clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions,
except fire-rated walls and partitions.
3.04 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square
foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and
16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm). Space 16 inches
(400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Apply
additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 4
DPR09328

3.05 FINISHES
5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation
surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13-mm) staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c., and cover
with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end
joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450
mm) o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered
gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface
with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches (150
mm) o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated
to receive vapor retarder.
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified
in Division 9.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect/Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.
3.06 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems,
materials, and equipment:
1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
2. Flexible connectors.
3. Vibration-control devices.
4. Testing agency labels and stamps.
5. Nameplates and data plates.
3.07 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Round and rectangular, supply-air ducts, concealed.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 5
DPR09328

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.
2. Thickness: 2 inches (50mm)
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B. Service: Round and rectangular, return-air ducts, concealed.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. No insulation is required if duct is located in a return air
plenum.
2. Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm).
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
C. Service: Round and rectangular, outside-air ducts, concealed.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.
2. Thickness: 2 inches (50mm).
3. Number of Layers: One
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes
END OF SECTION
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 6
DPR09328

23 07 19 PIPE INSULATION
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; fieldapplied
jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau
of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer
and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating
of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 150 or less.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping installer for insulation application.
B. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.06 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing
and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that
have satisfactory test results.
Pipe Insulation 23 07 19 - 1
DPR09328

2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Rubatex Corp.
2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. General: Insulation materials shall have a thermal conductivity, k, not exceeding
0.27 Btu per inch/h · ft 2 · ºF.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.03 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270 g/sq. m).
1. Tape Width: 4 inches (100 mm).
B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless
steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
2.04 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible
with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Pipe Insulation 23 07 19 - 2
DPR09328

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely
affect insulation application.
3.03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vaporretarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation
over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs at least 12 inches (300 mm) from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation
ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation
inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and
shield.
Pipe Insulation 23 07 19 - 3
DPR09328

M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm)
below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation
flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.
3.04 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness
as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and
attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For
check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to
stainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Pipe Insulation 23 07 19 - 4
DPR09328

3.05 FINISHES
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air
to the pipe surface.
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified
in Division 9.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect/Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.
3.06 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems,
materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for various
pipe sizes.
2. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various
pipe sizes.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance
with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according
to these Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.
3.08 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders,
and field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
Pipe Insulation 23 07 19 - 5
DPR09328

3.09 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: A/C condensate drain piping.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F (2 to 38 deg C).
2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: ½” thickness for all pipe sizes.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes
6. Finish: None
3.10 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Piping below
ground requiring insulation will be provided as part of a preinsulated double wall piping system
specified elsewhere.
B. Service: A/C condensate drain piping.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F (2 to 24 deg C).
2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: ½” thickness for all pipe sizes.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes
6. Finish: Weatherproof adhesive.
END OF SECTION
Pipe Insulation 23 07 19 - 6
DPR09328

23 31 13 METAL DUCTS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems
in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2500 Pa).
Metal ducts include the following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
B. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum,"
for aluminum supporting members and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint
and seam welding.
B. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.02 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 1
DPR09328

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having
G60 (Z180) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized
sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900
mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900
mm).
2.03 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive
or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight
seal.
D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized
butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying
with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
2. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted
with zinc-chromate primer.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 2
DPR09328

2.05 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according
to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and complying
with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications,
and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's
guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Nexus Inc.
c. Ward Industries, Inc.
C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Lockformer.
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches (750 mm) wide and up to 2-inch wg (500-Pa) pressure
class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm)
and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of
nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 1-inch wg (250 Pa).
2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg (250 Pa).
3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel.
3.02 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 3
DPR09328

D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches (300 mm), with a
minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular
to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
I. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
J. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
K. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings
on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
L. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
M. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches (600 mm) upstream of
registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel
primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9
painting Sections.
3.03 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
3.04 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200
mm) of each branch intersection.
B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m) and at each floor.
C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 4
DPR09328

1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing
and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section
being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system
design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating
pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round
and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower
than and equal to 2-inch wg (500 Pa) (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage
Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg (500 to 2500 Pa).
4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable.
3.07 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS
A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform
cleaning before air balancing.
B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from
HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of
entry into building.
D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply
and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air
wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers,
filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 5
DPR09328

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants
from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under
negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging
integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner
to get wet.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.
Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and
straighten fins.
F. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.
END OF SECTION
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 6
DPR09328

23 33 00 DUCT ACCESSORIES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Manual-volume dampers.
2. Turning vanes.
3. Flexible ducts.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Duct accessory hardware.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized,
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm) length
or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.02 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades
for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without
vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure
class.
1. Pressure Classifications of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for
ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating
shaft.
B. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design
as indicated, low-leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch
(1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated
for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
Duct Accessories 23 33 00 - 1
DPR09328

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
3. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
4. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing
assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper of a
multiple-damper assembly.
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-
mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center
hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.03 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, curved blades set 3/4
inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and
set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with
UL 181, Class 1.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches (89
mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick,
galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible
with connected ducts.
C. Conventional, Indoor System (minus 10 to plus 250 degrees F) Flexible Connector Fabric:
Glass fabric double coated with polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp, and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the
filling.
2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing
1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.
2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fibrous-glass
tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
C. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg (1500 Pa) positive, 1/2-inch wg (125 Pa) negative.
Duct Accessories 23 33 00 - 2
DPR09328

2.06 ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to
suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch (6-mm), zinc-plated
operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square-head
set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.
B. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing."
END OF SECTION
Duct Accessories 23 33 00 - 3
DPR09328

23 34 23 POWER VENTILATORS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
2. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.
3. Propeller fans.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type
of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturerinstalled
and field-installed wiring.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed
to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
Power Ventilators 23 34 23 - 1
DPR09328

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 8 Sections.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators:
a. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.
b. Breidert Air Products, Inc.
c. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.
d. Carnes Company HVAC.
e. Cook, Loren Company.
f. Greenheck Fan Corp.
g. Hartzell Fan, Inc.
h. ILG Industries, Inc./American Coolair Corp.
i. JennFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products, Inc.
j. PennBarry
2. Ceiling-Mounting Ventilators:
a. Breidert Air Products, Inc.
b. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.
c. Carnes Company HVAC.
d. Cook, Loren Company.
e. Greenheck Fan Corp.
f. ILG Industries, Inc./American Coolair Corp.
g. JennFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products, Inc.
h. PennBarry
Power Ventilators 23 34 23 - 2
DPR09328

3. Propeller Fans:
a. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.
b. Breidert Air Products, Inc.
c. Carnes Company HVAC.
d. Chicago Blower Corp.
e. Cincinnati Fan & Ventilator Co.
f. Cook, Loren Company.
g. Greenheck Fan Corp.
h. ILG Industries, Inc./American Coolair Corp.
i. JennFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products, Inc.
j. PennBarry
2.02 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan
shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, heavy gauged aluminum, mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
E. Accessories:
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 12 inches (300 mm).
3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.
2.03 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS
A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line
applications.
B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
Power Ventilators 23 34 23 - 3
DPR09328

C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and
fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
F. Accessories:
1. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
2. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.
2.04 PROPELLER FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven propeller fans consisting of fan blades, hub, housing,
orifice ring, motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with bakedenamel
finish coat applied after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron
hub.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub;
factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, statically and dynamically balanced
and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower,
with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.4.
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L 10 of 100,000 hours.
4. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.
5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with
motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment
range at fan design conditions.
6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
F. Accessories:
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon
bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable
for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.
5. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
Power Ventilators 23 34 23 - 4
DPR09328

2.05 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: Open dripproof.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods
of Testing Fans for Rating."
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).
1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete
base.
C. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 7
Sections.
D. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections
with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Equipment Startup Checks:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Power Ventilators 23 34 23 - 5
DPR09328

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection
is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
B. Starting Procedures:
1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
F. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures.
G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.05 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
Power Ventilators 23 34 23 - 6
DPR09328

23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling
and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes
and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located
in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction,
finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for
each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers,
and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Sections.
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard
for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 37 13 - 1
DPR09328

A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance
of Air Outlets and Inlets."
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements
for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict
with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service
and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
3.04 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed
surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that
have damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 37 13 - 2
DPR09328

23 81 26 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed
or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil for
cooling (heat rejection for heating operation in heat pump units) and a fan to circulate air to
conditioned space.
B. Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a
refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant (evaporator for heating operation
in heat pump units).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in
terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.
B. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with equipment supports.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in ad-
Split System Air Conditioning Units 23 81 26 - 1
DPR09328

dition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of substantial completion.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Filters: One set of filters that fit each return air grille.
2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
2. Lennox Industries Inc.
3. Trane Co. (The); Unitary Products Group.
4. York International Corp.
2.02 EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Single-wall with removable panels on front and ends.
1. Exterior Material: Minimum 18-gauge zinc coated galvanized steel with factory applied
weather-resistant baked enamel finish.
2. Insulation: Minimum 1” thick rigid fiberglass with anti-microbial coating.
3. Drain Pans: IAQ approved stainless steel or hard plastic, sloped to drain connection.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Condensate disposal: Condensate from all cooling coils and evaporators shall be conveyed
from the drain pan outlet to an approved place of disposal. Condensate shall not discharge
into a street, alley, sidewalk or other areas so as to cause nuisance.
1. Drain pipe material and sizes: Component of the condensate disposal system shall be
schedule 80 PVC pipe or tubing when they are exposed to ultra violet light. When not exposed
to ultraviolet light, components of condensate disposal system shall be cast iron,
galvanized steel, copper, cross-linked polyethylene, polybutylene, ABS, CPVC or PVC
pipe or tubing. All components shall be selected for the pressure, temperature and exposure
rating of installation. Condensate waste and drain line size shall be not less than
3/4-inch (19 mm) internal diameter and shall not decrease in size from the drain pan connection
to the place of condensate disposal. Where the drain pipes from the more than
one unit are manifolded together for condensate drainage, the pipe or tubing shall be
sized in accordance with an approved method. All horizontal sections of drain piping shall
be installed in uniform alignment at a uniform slope.
D. Auxiliary and secondary drain systems: In addition to the requirement of section 2.02/C, a
secondary drain or auxiliary drain pan shall be required for each cooling or evaporator coil or
fuel fired appliance that produces condensate, where damage to any building components
Split System Air Conditioning Units 23 81 26 - 2
DPR09328

will occur as a result of overflow from the equipment drain pan or stoppage in the condensate
drain piping. One of the following methods shall be used.
1. An auxiliary drain pan with a separate drain shall be provided under the coils on which
condensation will occur. The auxiliary pan drain shall discharge to conspicuous point of
disposal to alert occupants in the event of a stoppage of the primary drain, The pan shall
have a minimum depth of 1.5 inches (38 mm), shall not be less than 3 inches (76 mm)
larger than the unit of the coil dimensions in width and length and shall be constructed of
corrosion-resistant material. Metallic pans shall have a minimum thickness of not less
than 0.0276 (0.7 mm) galvanized sheet metal. Nonmetallic pans shall have a minimum
thickness of not less than 0.0625 inch (1.6mm).
E. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic
support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manualreset
thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection.
F. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.
G. Filters: Permanent, cleanable 80-85% efficient located in return air grille.
2.03 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings,
and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,
relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Scroll.
2. Two-speed compressor motor (if scheduled) with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat: Low voltage, programmable electronic thermostat, with the following features:
1. Password protected 7-day program with night setback and instant override for 1 to 3 hour
(adjustable) operation
2. Digital display indicating:
a. Day of week
b. Room temperature
c. Operating Mode
Split System Air Conditioning Units 23 81 26 - 3
DPR09328

d. Time of day
3. Compressor time delay.
B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, reinforced
concrete base; 4 inches (100 mm) larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork are specified in Division 3. Coordinate anchor installation with concrete
base.
C. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to
allow access to unit.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect fieldassembled
components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections,
and to prepare a written report of inspection.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components,
and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.04 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
Split System Air Conditioning Units 23 81 26 - 4
DPR09328

B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:
1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.
2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration transmission
to structure.
END OF SECTION
Split System Air Conditioning Units 23 81 26 - 5
DPR09328

23 82 39.16 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes propeller unit heaters.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of propeller unit heaters and suspension system components
with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Airtherm Manufacturing Company.
2. Chromolox
3. Engineered Air.
4. International Environmental Corp.
5. Ruffneck Heaters, Starozik Industries Ltd.
6. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.
2.02 UNIT HEATERS
A. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical discharge configuration
with radial louver diffuser in draw-through configuration and horizontal discharge configuration
with horizontal, adjustable louvers in blow-through configuration.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Casing: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.
B. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer and manufacturer's
standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before
shipping.
2.04 ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE HEATING ELEMENTS
A. Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in
magnesium-oxide insulating refractory and sealed in high-mass steel or corrosion-resistant
metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch (4 mm). Element ends shall be enclosed in
Propeller Unit Heaters 23 82 39.16 - 1
DPR09328

2.05 FAN
terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F (288 deg C) at any point
during normal operation.
1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit
controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.
2. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
A. Propeller with aluminum blades directly connected to motor.
2.06 FAN MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 hp and Smaller: shaded-pole or permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with
integral thermal-overload protection.
B. Motors, 3/4 hp and Larger: Totally enclosed with permanently lubricated ball bearings.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Horizontal Configuration: Louver fin diffuser.
B. Vertical Configuration: Louver cone diffuser.
2.08 CONTROLS
A. Control Devices: Unit-mounted fan-speed switch and thermostat.
2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before
propeller unit heater installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.
B. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber
hangers).
Propeller Unit Heaters 23 82 39.16 - 2
DPR09328

3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation
and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical
connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
3.05 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean propeller unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install new filters in each propeller unit heater within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Owners Representative, with at least seven days'
advance notice.
END OF SECTION
Propeller Unit Heaters 23 82 39.16 - 3
DPR09328

26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational
electrical systems, as specified herein.
B. This Section, as well as Division 1, concerns all other Sections in Division 26, and shall be
considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS' QUALIFICATIONS
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen, trained and experienced in their crafts, and who
are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work in this Division. A
licensed Journeyman shall be on site at all times when electrical work is being performed.
Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who
holds a valid license in the State of Texas.
B. Submit copy of Master Electrician’s license and each Journeyman’s license that will be
working on the project. Workers must be licensed to work in Dallas, Texas.
C. WORKMANSHIP
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The appearance
of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and equipment
shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site.
Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. Conduit,
transformers, and motors shall be isolated to avoid unacceptable noise levels from
objectionable vibrations from all systems.
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and
clearly marked identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as
specified.
B. Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details.
C. Complete interconnection and point to point wiring diagrams in AutoCAD format for all field
control and instrumentation wiring between instruments, electrical equipment, starters, VFDs,
etc. A hard copy shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to the final AutoCAD
files being submitted. Interconnection/wiring diagrams shall include cable numbers, wire tags,
actual equipment terminal strip numbers at both ends of the cable, etc.
D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain the approved shop drawings, submittals,
spare part lists, schematics, final wiring diagrams with any changes made during start-up and
maintenance procedures.
Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-1
DRP09328

E. Unless other additional information is required by the detailed equipment specifications, the
following information shall be included for motors:
1.04 STANDARDS
1. Motor identification number and nomenclature as specified
2. Make and motor type
3. Brake horsepower of the motor
4. Locked rotor current at full load
5. Motor efficiency at full load (3-phase motors only)
6. Starting torque
7. Method of insulating and impregnating motor coils (3-phase only)
8. Speed of the motor at full torque
9. Full load current
10. Service factor
11. Motor temperature rise measured by resistance over 40 degrees C ambient
A. Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and national codes,
ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the standards
and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply. The applicable provisions
of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety:
National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
National Electrical Code (NEC)
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Uniform Building Code (UBC)
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Local utility companies
Local Electrical Ordinance
Rural Electrification Association (REA)
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA)
International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)
Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC)
B. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who
holds a valid license in the State of Texas.
Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-2
DRP09328

1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Follow the Manufacturer's directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and
materials. Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt, water, chemical or
mechanical injury and theft. Major electrical equipment shall be stored indoors and space
heaters energized where applicable. Equipment that will be stored indoors for an extended
period of time and that do not have space heaters shall have a 100 watt incandescent light
placed in it and energized to eliminate the build-up of condensation in the equipment.
Coordinate with equipment manufacturer for additional storage requirements. Damaged
equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the materials until the work is
completed and accepted by the OWNER.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law by the
CONTRACTOR for the completion of the work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid
for, and delivered to the OWNER before receiving the final acceptance of the work.
B. The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate and
subject to revisions at the time the work is installed. Final location shall be as proposed by
the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER.
C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work, or if equipment or accessories
can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on the plans, the
CONTRACTOR shall before proceeding with the work prepare and submit plans of the
proposed rearrangement for the ENGINEER's review and approval.
D. Motor Horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings. If the actual equipment is a
different size, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the appropriate wiring, conduit, over current
protection, starters and accessories for a complete and working system at no cost to the
OWNER.
E. Enclosures for equipment in the air conditioned rooms shall be NEMA 1, 14 gauge steel for
Air Conditioned Spaces, NEMA 12 Steel for Ventilated Spaces, NEMA 3R for exterior
locations, NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel for corrosive areas and as specified on plans for all
other locations.
2.00 EXECUTION
2.01 INSTALLATION
A. Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the roof, exterior walls and
floors.
B. Install stainless steel sleeves for each conduit passing through floors. Extend sleeves 1-1/2"
above the floor slab and grout watertight. The sleeve sizes shall permit the subsequent
insertion of a properly sized conduit or raceway.
C. Submit location drawings and obtain ENGINEER approval prior to installing conduit
penetrations through slabs, beams, and walls. Install stainless steel pipe sleeves around the
conduit and raceway which pass through walls and masonry exterior walls. The inside
diameter of the sleeves shall be at least 1/2" greater than the outside of the service pipes.
After the pipes are installed into these sleeves, fill the annular space between the pipes and
sleeves with mastic. The complete installation shall be watertight and the fire rating of
penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be maintained.
Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-3
DRP09328

D. Install steel reinforced concrete foundations below floor mounted switchboards, panelboards,
motor control centers, soft starters, transformers, and other floor mounted electrical
equipment. Concrete foundations shall be not be less than 4" high or as indicated on plans.
Neatly chamfer top edges. Concrete foundations shall be 6" wider and 6" longer than the
base of the equipment being installed or as indicated on plans. Concrete shall be in
accordance with Division 03, and shall be reinforced with a minimum of 6" x 6" #6 welded wire
mesh or as indicated on plans.
E. Route all conduits parallel to building lines, columns, or steel route conduits near to columns
and roof beams.
2.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected
masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural
supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be
permitted without the specific written approval of the ENGINEER.
2.03 PAINTING
A. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed, unless specifically
indicated on the plans or specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or during installation,
re-finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance equal to the original factory finish. Leave
equipment and raceway systems clean and free of grease, dirt, rust, and in a suitable
condition for painting.
2.04 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING
A. Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the OWNER’s representative, utility companies
and OWNER’s facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to
excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice to
the OWNER prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation
until authorized by the OWNER. Utilities or services which are damaged, which are identified
prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies has not been
obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable condition
immediately, at no cost to the OWNER.
B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades for
excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches shall
be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily identifiable
sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be illuminated or
recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all
times.
C. Protect all adjacent work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent work, structures or
properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full.
Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-4
DRP09328

D. All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the contract documents, or to the
conditions of the site prior to construction. Grading shall bring the site back to the existing
conditions as close as practical. Turfed areas shall be sodded, or hydro-mulched with
matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery, ground cover, or plants
as existed. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf and
landscaping until established. If new turf and landscaping is impractical due to weather
conditions, CONTRACTOR shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and
landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90-day
warranty on new turf and landscaping.
E. Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation. Obtain record or asbuilt
drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. Determine
by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged systems to
their original condition prior to beginning construction.
2.05 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES
A. Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for
exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the OWNER with two (2)
keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the OWNER's locking
system.
2.06 CLEAN AND ADJUST
A. Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it
accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical
installation so that it is suitable for the OWNER's use.
END OF SECTION
Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-5
DRP09328

26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install 600 volt wires and
cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.
B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular
wiring systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: TESTING
Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. Torque test
conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer's recommended values. Megger tests
shall be performed by a testing company with a minimum of 10 years experience. All low voltage
cables shall be verified by use of telephone communications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Low voltage wire
B. Ground wire
1.04 STANDARDS
The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety:
ICEA S-19-81/NEMA WC-3
ICEA S-61-402/NEMA WC-5
Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy
Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged
insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. CONDUCTORS: Soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98%
pure copper bearing the U.L. label. The minimal size shall be #12 unless specified otherwise
on plans. Conductors #8 or larger and conductors #14 shall be stranded. Utilize single
conductors.
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-1
DRP09328

B. SINGLE CONDUCTORS: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and
insulated with XHHW-2 insulation. Wire shall be water tank tested and approved as machine
tool wire, in accordance with National Machine Tool Builders Association. Wire in light fixture
channels and other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC
Article 300. Wire shall be manufactured by Southwire, Okonite, General Cable, and Houston
Wire & Cable
C. GROUND WIRE: Class B stranded tin-plated conductor without insulation shall be used for
outdoor buried applications, green insulation for ground wires in raceways.
2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material,
type, and class for application and service indicated.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and
lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
1. Conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice.
Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing of conductors shall be
performed in any below ground structure.
2. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes for branch circuits. Splices for all other circuits shall
be disallowed. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Pull
conductors into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed, water based, wire pulling
lubricant for pulling No. 4AWG and larger wire. Install raceway first as a complete system
without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in
place.
3. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans
indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the
plans shall be in its own conduit.
4. Properly support cables in accordance with the NEC and manufacturer’s
recommendations in all raceways. Provide strain relief as required.
5. The cable shall not be bent to a radius no smaller than the manufacturer cable’s minimum
bending radius.
6. Sharing of neutrals in not allowed.
7. Verify all cables and conductors by field telephone communications. Any conductor not
tested as specified will be de-terminated, tested and re-terminated at the Contractor’s
expense. Payment will not be made for the work until the test has been done.
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-2
DRP09328

8. All terminated conductors shall be labeled as specified prior to final terminations being
done. Any conductor that is de-terminated for any reason shall be re-tested. All
associated controls, if tested before, shall be re-tested.
B. SINGLE CONDUCTORS: Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices
shall be made except at outlets. Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to
equipment without straining. Light switches and receptacles shall be connected with pig tails
and crimp on connectors.
C. GROUND CONDUCTORS
1. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an insulated equipment grounding conductor
whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other
equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electrical Code
requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid
aluminum conduit. Bond each end of each of the conduit to the ground system. Make
connections to equipment with solderless connections. All connections to ground rods
shall be of the fused type utilizing an exothermic welding process.
2. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway, metallic boxes and
metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid
ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor which
it houses. Clean the metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. Grounding
connections to motors shall be to the grounding stud which shall be threaded into the
stationary frame; Use Burndy KC Servit, or approved equal. The ground wire shall not be
lugged to a mounting bolt.
3. Ground wire shall be uninsulated tin plated copper sized as shown on the plans in all
cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other
conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete.
In all other cases, insulate ground wire with green insulation as specified for low voltage
wire. Provide and size bonding conductors in accordance with the National Electrical
Code.
4. Provide a bare tinned copper ground conductor the entire length of the cable tray shown
on plans, existing and new. Bond each end of the tinned copper ground conductor to
each section and to every enclosure served by the conductors in the cable tray system.
END OF SECTION
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-3
DRP09328

26 05 19.01 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wire connections and
devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
600 volt connectors shall comply with the specifications and the following Manufacturers will
be acceptable:
1. Burndy
2. Thomas & Betts
3. Ideal Industries
4. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include Record
Data for:
A. Wire connections and devices.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. CONNECTORS, COMPRESSION, COPPER, 600 VOLT : Of the appropriate hole sizes and
spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards; two (2) holes in the tongue for use on
conductor sizes 250 kcmil or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the
lighting and/or receptacle panels.
B. 600 VOLT PLASTIC TAPE: Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company, No. 35.
C. WIRENUTS: Silicone-based pre-filled spring wire connecting devices with plastic covering;
UL listed for damp and wet locations. Wirenut shall meet requirements of UL 486D for
Sealed Wire Connector Systems and shall be manufactured by Ideal Industries, Inc model 63,
or as manufactured by ITT or Panduit. Wirenut shall be spring insulated, properly sized and
resistant to vibration may be used for No.12 through No.10 solid gauge conductor for lighting
and branch circuits only.
D. SPLIT BOLTS: Kearney, Burndy, or Ilsco; shall be usable for connecting conductors which
are both copper, both aluminum or one copper and one aluminum. Split bolts shall have a
spacer between the two conductors which it connects.
E. MECHANICAL SET SCREW CONNECTOR: Blackburn HPS, ADR-ALCUL, GP or GT,
Burndy or Ilsco; consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite ends for
insertion of the conductors. Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be clamped by
two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors.
Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 19.01-1
DRP09328

F. RUBBER TAPE: Scotch 2210.
G. ARC PROOFING TAPE: 3M “Scotch 77 Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape”. Medium
voltage cable shall be fireproofed in all manholes and handholes. Fireproofing shall be done
with a half-lapped layer of arc proofing tape, anchored at each end with a double wrap of 3M
“Scotch 69 Glass Cloth Electrical Tape”.
H. VINYL TAPE: Scotch 88.
I. INSULATING RESIN: Scotch 3576, 3577, or 3578.
J. POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS: Ferraz Shawmut, Ilsco or Allen-Bradley; rated for 600
VAC and termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of tin plated
aluminum and mounted on an insulating base.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. For No. 10 and smaller, connect conductors with a twist-on spring wirenut. If a splice or tap is
below 3' above the final grade, fill the spring connectors with an electrical insulating resin so
that conductor and spring materials are encapsulated by the resin. Conductor splices and
taps inside the MCC, VFDs, panels, etc. shall be on the terminal strips or power distribution
blocks.
B. Splice 600 Volt conductors in junction boxes or at outlets only. All splices are subject to the
Engineer’s approval. Obtain approval from Engineer before installing any splices.
C. For No. 8 and larger, connect conductors with a split bolt type of connector or a mechanical,
set screw type connector. Wrap splices and taps with a single half-lapped layer or rubber
tape followed by successive layers of vinyl tape until a vinyl tape layer thickness of twice the
original conductor insulation thickness is achieved. If splice or tap is below 3' above the
finished grade, the tape or splice shall have a final outer coating or insulating resin.
D. Furnish and install power distribution blocks as required for tapping conductors at their load
connection point with conductors of smaller size. Install power distribution blocks with the
number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the phase, neutral, and ground conductors.
E. Pair shielded cable shield shall be broken at terminal strips only.
F. Application of tape shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 19.01-2
DRP09328

26 05 26 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding
system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as shown on
the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00,
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Grounding materials, equipment and processes.
B. Product Data: For each type of product supplied.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional ground rods
and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to National Electrical Code
requirements. Ground resistance measurement shall not exceed 5 ohms. Add ground rods as
required to bring resistance to 5 ohms and connect to grounding system.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. GROUND RODS: Copper-clad steel, having a diameter of 3/4" and a minimum length of 10'.
B. GROUND CABLES: Stranded, bare tinned copper of 98% conductivity and as specified in
Section 26 05 19, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.
C. CONDUIT GROUND FITTINGS: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be FCI
Burndy Corp., type NE or Thomas & Betts No. 3951 series.
D. GROUND ROD BOXES: Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read “ground rod” on lid.
Brooks Precast Model. “3-RT” or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in driveway
areas shall have an AASHTO HS-20 rating.
E. EXOTHERMIC WELDING PROCESS: CADWELD MATERIALS – as manufactured by
ERICO products or approved equal.
Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-1
DRP09328

2.02 PROCESSES
A. All grounding system connections to building steel and ground rods shall be exothermically
welded including all cable connections, and cable steel terminations. The use of mechanical
type connections is not acceptable.
B. Any concealed connection (buried, encased in concrete or otherwise sealed) shall be done
only with exothermic welds.
C. All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. Connections
made from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 and 837 and as
listed in MIL 419 and other standards, National Electrical Code, etc.
2.03 GROUNDING SYSTEM
Provide a complete grounding system that includes all connections and the testing of ground rods,
ground cables, ground buses, conduits, fittings, anchor supports, thermite process materials and
equipment and other materials required for a complete installation. Grounding system shall be
installed and sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted/clamp type connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Exothermically welded connectors,
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermically welded connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermically welded connectors.
B. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes.
C. Install ground cables in conduits above grade or directly buried in earth to a depth of not less
than 12" below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection so as not to
break ground cables or connections. If ground cables are exposed, run in conduits for added
protection.
D. Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted,
except where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs.
buildings, etc., and when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, nonmetallic
materials.
E. Install a green-colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in
accordance with NEC Article 250.
F. Where ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete, use standard bare tinned copper
cable, in all other cases install a green-colored insulation, equipment grounding conductor in
accordance with Section 26 05 19, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Provide grounding
conductors as required per the NEC.
Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-2
DRP09328

G. Metal conduits stubbed up into switchgear, motor control center or other electrical equipment
shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the equipment
ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with applicable sections of the National
Electrical Code. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC and sized
in accordance with the NEC.
H. Provide exothermic weld connection for extension to existing stub-up ground conductors.
I. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC.
2. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect type
connection is required; use a bolt on crimp type lug.
J. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,
using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using
one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed,
connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor
conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
K. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1-1/2” or larger shall have bonding jumpers.
Bonding jumpers shall be external, run in parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie
wraps. Bonding jumpers shall be insulated copper conductors. CONTRACTOR shall provide
bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
L. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduit systems, cable armor,
exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be
grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. Provide grounding
and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC and sized in accordance with the NEC.
M. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor
sized in accordance with NEC Article 250.
N. Where exothermic bonding is used, molds shall be of the appropriate size for the wire and rod
used. All bonds shall remain exposed for inspection of the OWNER’s Representative.
O. Ground rod shall be installed such that the top of the ground rod is 6” below grade and
enclosed by a ground rod box.
Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-3
DRP09328

P. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a
sufficient length of #12 wire with green-colored insulation to connect to the grounding terminal
at the receptacle.
Q. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or
handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If
necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare,
tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in
manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of
pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6
inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
R. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts,
cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to
ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded,
hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and
fasten to manhole walls.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and
proper installation.
B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent to measure resistance to
ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with the test instrument manufacturer’s
recommendation using the fall of potential method.
C. All test equipment provided under this section shall be approved by the ENGINEER.
D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the
form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical
resistance to ground.
E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system.
F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system.
G. Notify the ENGINEER immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is
greater than five ohms. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as required to bring
the resistance to five ohms.
END OF SECTION
Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-4
DRP09328

26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include Record
Data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for
field assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 1
DRP09328

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
4. Slotted channel shall be galvanized steel for all areas except corrosive areas, slotted
channel shall be 316 stainless steel for corrosive areas.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: galvanized steel hangers for all areas except corrosive
areas, slotted hangers shall be 316 stainless steel for corrosive areas, clamps, straps and
associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; galvanized steel for all areas except corrosive areas, plates, shapes and
bars shall be 316 stainless steel for corrosive areas.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, galvanized steel for all areas except
corrosive areas, ancors shall be 316 stainless steel for corrosive areas, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
2. Concrete Inserts: Galvanized Steel for all areas except corrosive areas, inserts shall be
316 stainless steel for corrosive areas, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
4. Through Bolts: Galvanized Steel for all areas except corrosive areas, through bolts shall
be 316 stainless steel for corrosive areas, Structural type, hex head, and high strength.
Comply with ASTM A 325.
5. Toggle Bolts: Galvanized steel springhead type for all areas except corrosive areas, toggle
bolts shall be 316 stainless steel for corrosive areas.
6. Hanger Rods: Threaded galvanized steel for all areas except corrosive areas, hanger
rods shall be 316 stainless steel for corrosive areas.
7. Washers: Galvanized steel for all areas except corrosive areas, wahsers shall be 316
stainless steel for corrosive areas.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 2
DRP09328

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
RIGID METAL CONDUIT as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with stainless steel
slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future
without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using
spring friction action for retention in support channel.
3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RIGID METAL
CONDUIT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in
NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so
strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers,
and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.03 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions
than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete.
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 3
DRP09328

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 4
DRP09328

26 05 33.01 CONDUITS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete conduit
system for each type of electrical system. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Div. 26
ELECTRICAL specifications.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Record Data to include cut sheets of each material to be used on the project.
1.03 STANDARDS
The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety:
ANSI C80.1
ANSI/NEMA FB 1
NEMA RN 1
NEMA TC 2
NEMA TC 3
Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated
Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies
PVC Externally-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical
Metallic Tubing
Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80)
PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT:
1. FOR USE WITH RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Single strip, helically wound, interlocking
aluminum, in accordance with Fed. Spec. WW-C-566 and U.L. listed. Conduit shall have
an extruded, polyvinyl jacket over the interlocking aluminum. Acceptable product shall be
Anaconda Sealtite EFL.
B. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Heavy wall, aluminum alloy 6063; low temper number, tube,
free from defects and manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.5 standards and U.L.
listed. Acceptable manufacturers shall be VAW, Western, and Alumax.
C. PVC COATED RIGID ALUMINUM: Meeting the requirements of rigid aluminum conduit; 40
mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating, U.L. 6A listed. Acceptable
Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote.
D. PVC COATED RIGID STEEL: Heavy wall, mild steel tube with metallic, corrosion-resistant
coating on interior and exterior, hot-dipped, galvanized steel, free from defects rigid steel
conduit; 40 mil PVC, exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating; manufactured in
accordance with Fed. Spec. WW-C-581, ANSI C80.1 standards, and U.L. listed. Acceptable
Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote.
Conduits 26 05 33.01-1
DRP09328

E. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Single strip, helically wound, interlocking,
aluminum, in accordance with U.L. 1. Liquid tight conduit shall have an extruded, polyvinyl
jacket over the flexible metal. Acceptable product shall be Anaconda Type U.A.
F. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: Schedule 40 high impact, polyvinylchloride, in accordance
with Fed. Spec. W-C-1094 and U.L. listed. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Carlon,
Cantex, and Certainteed.
G. FITTINGS AND CONDUIT BODIES:
1. RIGID METAL CONDUIT: Threaded type material to match the conduit, in accordance
with ANSI/NEMA FB1 and as manufactured by Appleton Form 35, Killark "O" Series,
Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, or RACO.
2. FLEXIBLE AND LIQUID TIGHT FITTINGS: In accordance with ANSI/NEMA FB1;
cadmium-plated, malleable iron body and nut; aluminum ferrule; insulated throat;
integrally-cast, external ground lugs, as manufactured by Appleton "ST" series, Hubbel,
OZ Gedney Type 4QL, or RACO.
3. PVC CONDUIT: Solvent-welded, slip-on joints, in accordance with NEMA TC3, as
manufactured by Carlon, CertainTeed.
4. CONDUIT SEALS: Explosion-proof, rigid metal conduit fitting as defined by NEC Article
500, and as manufactured by Crouse Hinds fitting with Chico "X" Fiber and Chico "A"
compound or Appleton fitting with Apelco fiber and compound. Seal shall be same
material as conduit.
H. ELBOW AND BENDS: Rigid, nonmetallic conduit system shall use PVC-coated rigid steel for
conduits 2" and larger for all bends greater than 45 degrees. Meeting the requirements of
rigid steel conduit; 40 mil PVC, exterior coating and 2 mil red urethane interior coating.
Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote. Other
conduit systems shall use the same material as the conduit with which they are installed.
I. BUSHINGS: High impact, thermosetting, phenolic insulation; 150 degrees C.; as
manufactured by Appleton "BBUH", Blackburn, or OZ Gedney type A.
J. GROUNDING BUSHINGS: Conduit grounding bushings shall consist of an aluminum,
insulated throat conduit bushing with an attached aluminum set screw lug. Grounding
bushing shall comply with Fed. Spec. W-F-408b and W-W-C-581d, UL Standards 514B and
467, and shall be Crouse Hinds Lazy Lug or approved equal.
K. HUBS:
1. ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Cast aluminum, with broad flat surfaces with gripping teeth on
both sides of conduit entry. Hub portion on exterior side of entry shall contain "O" ring for
watertight seal of conduit entry. Hubs shall be Meyers Hub, Appleton or Efcor.
L. CONDUIT THROUGH-WALL AND FLOOR SEAL: Malleable iron body with oversized
sleeves, sealing ring, pressure clamp and rings and sealing grommet; hex head cap screw, as
manufactured by OZ Gedney, type FSK.
M. END BELLS: Hot-dipped, galvanized, threaded, malleable iron, as manufactured by OZ
Gedney type TNS.
N. EXPANSION FITTINGS: Aluminum with aluminum bonding jumpers. Linear expansion
fittings shall be OZ Gedney Zx for rigid, use with aluminum conduit or Appleton "XJ" series.
Combination linear and deflection expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney type AXDX.
Conduits 26 05 33.01-2
DRP09328

O. THREADED NIPPLES: As manufactured by Allied or Triangle. Aluminum Conduit nipples
shall have two (2) independent sets of threads. Running threads shall not be used. Utilize
the conduit union when joining two (2) fixed conduits in a continuous run.
P. ACCESSORIES: Reducers, washers, etc., shall be cadmium-plated, malleable iron.
Q. IDENTIFYING TAPE FOR BURIED CONDUITS: 6" wide, polyethylene with continuous
printing along the length of the tape, as manufactured by Brady "Identoline" or Sentry Line
"Terra Tape". Use red with black letters for buried electrical power conduits. Use green with
black letters for buried electric instrumentation and communication conduits.
R. CONDUIT DRAINS: Conduit drains shall be 316 stainless steel as manufactured by Crouse
Hinds ECD Universal, or approved equal.
S. DUCT BANK SPACERS: Interlocking module spacers as manufactured by Formex, or
approved equal.
T. LINK SEAL: Link seal shall be modular, mechanical type, consisting of inter-locking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the space between the conduit and the wall opening.
Link seal shall be suitable for use in a core-drilled and pre-cast wall openings and shall be
manufactured by Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc or approved equal.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
Conduit types shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule:
A. BURIED CONDUIT: PVC Schedule 40 or PVC coated rigid aluminum unless noted
otherwise.
B. ABOVE GRADE CONDUIT: Rigid Aluminum unless noted otherwise.
C. PVC COATED RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Shall be used for all underground conduit
bends 45° or more where the conduit ultimately terminates to aluminum conduit; and for
conduit stub-ups through concrete and concrete wall penetrations.
D. PVC COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT: Shall be used for all underground conduit bends
45° or more where the conduit ultimately terminates to aluminum conduit above grade and
schedule 40 PVC below grade. All conduit in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated rigid steel
conduit, no exceptions.
E. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: May be used in all locations. PVC coated rigid aluminum
conduit shall be used in corrosive environments or where in contact with concrete.
F. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: May be used in non-hazardous locations, installed single
or grouped either underground or encased in concrete.
G. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT: Shall only be used to equipment in nonhazardous
locations not subject to physical damage or excessive temperatures, requiring
vibration isolation unless otherwise indicated, 6’-0” maximum length. The bending radius
shall be in accordance with Chapter 9, Table 2 of the NEC and shall not deform or alter the
flex jacket.
Conduits 26 05 33.01-3
DRP09328

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
1. Size conduits as required by the National Electrical Code for the number and sizes of
wires to be drawn into the conduit. Conduit less than ¾” shall not be used unless
specified otherwise.
2. Conduit stubbed-up under free standing enclosures located indoors in an electrical room,
etc., such as a motor control center, shall be PVC and have a PVC bell terminator that is
solvent welded onto each conduit end. End bell shall be installed flush with the finished
floor.
3. Underground conduit shall be concrete capped. Conduit which is below the finished
grade shall be rigid PVC, except where indicated on the plans. Unless otherwise
indicated, all other conduit shall be rigid aluminum.
4. At the transition from underground and or from concrete, protect PVC conduit from
mechanical damage by extending PVC coated rigid steel conduit a maximum of 12" and
a minimum of 4" into the earth or concrete at the transition.
5. Aluminum conduit, straps, and struts shall not be in direct contact with concrete. Provide
a neoprene washer between the two materials.
6. Aluminum conduit which penetrates into concrete shall be factory-coated with 0.20" of
polyvinylchloride, per Spec. MIL-P-15147.
7. Conduit extending into concrete shall not be closer than 3" from adjacent conduit and
shall not be closer than 1" from any reinforcement bars.
8. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade level, above concrete slab level, or for any
exposed installations unless specified. Conduit shall not be placed horizontally in a
concrete floor slab or a beam without the ENGINEER's written approval.
9. Flexible metal conduit (sealtight) used for connecting light fixtures, i.e., fixture whips, shall
be 1/2" as a minimum. Fixture whips shall contain only three conductors: one hot, one
neutral, and one equipment grounding conductor. Other conduit types shall be 3/4" as a
minimum. The inside surface of the conduit shall be reamed smooth after it has been cut.
10. Provide conduit sizes as shown on the plans. Where hash marks are used to indicate the
number of conductors in a conduit without indicating the conduit size, provide a 3/4"
conduit for up to nine #12 conductors, and a 1" conduit for ten to 20 #12 conductors.
11. Where conduits stub up through a floor slab from below finished floor level for multi-level
structures, install a threaded fitting with PVC plug so that the top of the fitting is flush with
the concrete or finished floor surface.
12. Conduit system shall be swabbed clean prior to installation of conductors.
13. Ground conduits in accordance with the National Electrical Code and Specification 26 05
26, GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
14. Contractor shall properly tape PVC coated aluminum conduit where it transitions to PVC
conduit in underground concrete encased duct banks so that no aluminum conduit is in
contact with concrete encasement. Tape shall be manufactured by Scotch or approved
equal. Coordinate with tape manufacturer for type of tape to use for the installation.
B. UNDERGROUND
1. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 12" deep to the top of the concrete cap and 18”
to the top of the duct bank for 600V duct banks and as shown on the plans, whichever is
greater. Backfill buried conduit banks with material which is free from large rock, paving
material, or large angular substance. Install underground conduit with the conduit duct
bank dimensions shown on the plans. Adhere to conduit spacing by using spacers at
intervals to ensure that proper spacings are maintained. The concrete shall be red in
color.
Conduits 26 05 33.01-4
DRP09328

2. Grade underground and outdoor conduits to drain free of condensation and moisture.
Provide for automatic draining at lowpoints. Install horizontal runs of conduit to provide a
natural drain for condensation without pockets or traps where moisture may collect.
3. Underground conduits shall drain to an underground structure with a floor drain, such as a
manhole or a building basement.
4. Install conduit drain assemblies in outside or underground conduits to provide for draining.
5. Underground conduit bends shall have a minimum 2' bend radius. Underground conduit
bends which are 45 degrees or more and which are on conduits of 2" or greater shall
utilize factory pvc coated rigid steel bends.
6. Minimum size for underground conduits is 1”.
7. Contractor shall install duct bank spacers every 8 feet.
8. Conduit shall slope uniformly at not less than 4” per 100’, or more than 60” per 100’
unless indicated otherwise on the plans or approved by the Engineer. Arrange duct banks
to drain into manholes with no low pockets in the duct runs.
C. ROUTING AND SUPPORT
1. Use the conduit route where shown on the plans. Route conduits that do not have a
specified route in the most direct path between the two points, i.e. home runs shown with
an arrow symbol. Route conduits parallel to building lines. Concealed conduits on the
plans shall be below grade, within walls, or above ceilings.
2. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Otherwise,
route conduit through the roof with pitch pocket. Conduit shall not penetrate ductwork.
Exposed conduit shall not be installed on the roof without the ENGINEER's prior approval.
3. Install conduit at elevations which maintain headroom, and at locations which avoid
interference with other work requiring grading of pipe, the structure, finished walls, etc.
Avoid crossing other work. Conduits shall not be placed in close proximity to equipment,
systems, and service lines. Maintain a minimum of 3" separation, except in crossing
which shall be a minimum of 1". Conduits shall not be installed/concealed in water
bearing walls.
4. Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings and basements, as shown
on the plans. Rigidly support conduits to the building structures using hardware bolted or
screwed to the structure. The mounting hardware shall not mount the conduit directly on
concrete walls and ceilings, but shall space the conduit away from the surfaces using
mineralac-type hardware, strut channel clamps, or one hole straps with clamp backs.
5. Provide expansion fittings at expansion, construction and seismic joints. Provide
combination expansion/deflection fittings where conduits are concealed at these joints.
6. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical. Use a conduit rack constructed of
channels with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for an additional 25% conduit.
7. Parallel runs of conduit shall have bends and offsets made a the same point such that the
angle of bend is the same in each conduit and the conduits remain parallel throughout the
run. Conduits not installed in this manner shall be removed and reinstalled at the
Contractor’s expense. Conductors that are installed shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
8. Conduits installed in parallel shall be arranged such that crossings are eliminated.
9. Rigid aluminum conduit systems shall utilize aluminum straps, clamps and strut channel.
Coated rigid steel or aluminum conduit shall utilize PVC factory coated or fiberglass
straps, clamps and thread rods, etc. as manufactured by Robroy.
10. Nuts, bolts, concrete anchor bolts and other metallic fasteners shall be 316 stainless
steel.
Conduits 26 05 33.01-5
DRP09328

11. Install conduit other than PVC with threaded couplings and other threaded fittings.
Threadless, or clamp type fittings shall not be used on metallic conduit. Rigid aluminum
conduit shall have each set of threads coated with an oxidation inhibitor, Ilsco, De-Ox, ITT
Noalox, Blackburn Contax or approved equal.
12. Use PVC coated, rigid aluminum, factory elbows for bends in PVC conduit.
13. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture.
14. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes, etc. in wet or damp locations per
the National Electrical Code.
15. Install a pulling string in empty (spare) conduit, except sleeves and nipples, and leave for
future pulling as applicable.
D. TERMINATIONS
1. Use threaded hubs for termination of conduits. Locknut termination of conduits shall not
be used on this project.
2. Conduit terminations shall not penetrate the top of NEMA 4X and NEMA 3R enclosures.
E. HAZARDOUS AREAS
1. Install conduit seals at all penetrations to hazardous areas, as defined by the NEC and as
shown on the plans. Install additional seal-type fittings within the hazardous area in
accordance with the requirements of the NEC Article 500.
2. Install dam and sealing compound per the seal Manufacturer's instructions.
3. Provide flexible conduit which is listed for use in hazardous areas. Conduit, flexible
conduit, fittings and all other materials shall be listed for use in a Class I Division 2
Group(s) C&D atmosphere.
END OF SECTION
Conduits 26 05 33.01-6
DRP09328

26 05 33.02 WIREWAYS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete wireway
system. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. Contractor shall size wireways in accordance with the National
Electrical Code.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include Record
Data for:
A. Wireways
2.00 PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS
A. WIREWAY: Provide as manufactured by Hoffman or equal.
B. WIREWAY ENCLOSURES, SUPPORTS AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS: NEMA 1 (metallic)
for Air Conditioned spaces, NEMA 12 for ventilated areas, NEMA 3R for exterior locations and
NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for hazardous/corrosive areas, lay-in wireway, continuously
welded seams, oil resistant gasket. Hoffman Lay-In-Type wireway or equal. Factory ANSI 61
gray finish for NEMA 1.
2.02 FABRICATIONS
A. WIREWAYS: Complete wireway system with enclosures, supports, and associated fittings,
having the form and dimension suited to the application, and as manufactured by Hoffman or
approved equal.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide systems of wireways of sufficient size where indicated.
B. Size wireway cross-sectional area and length based upon conductor fill and equipment served
as required by NEC and local codes.
C. Install types based on environmental conditions to which exposed.
END OF SECTION
Wireways 26 05 33.02-1
DRP09328

26 05 33.03 OUTLET BOXES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install outlet boxes. Electrical
work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
ELECTRICAL.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Steel City Series 600
1.03 SUBMITTALS
No submittals required for Section 26 05 33.03, OUTLET BOXES.
1.04 STANDARDS
The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety:
ANSI/NEMA OS 1
ANSI/NEMA OS 2
Sheet steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports.
Non-metallic outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. GENERAL: Furnish boxes with proper covers and device plates
B. CAST BOXES: Cast feralloy metal, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs and integral
mounting lugs. Use cast boxes for damp and outdoor installation. Boxes shall be
manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or approved equal.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION; COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS
A. Provide electrical boxes in the locations shown on the Plans, and as required for splices, taps,
wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance.
B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned.
Verify locations of boxes and outlets prior to rough-in. Outlet locations may be modified to
accommodate changes in door swings, space changes or to clear other interferences that
arise or from job modifications. Make such modifications at no cost to the OWNER as a
matter of job coordination. Coordinate job conditions and notify the ENGINEER of
discrepancies before proceeding with the installation of the work. Set wall boxes in advance
of wall construction blocked in place, and secured. Set wall boxes flush with the finish. Install
extension sleeves as required to extend boxes to finished surfaces.
Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.03-1
DRP09328

C. Unless otherwise noted, location of outlet boxes shall be as follows:
Equipment or Outlets
Toggle switches
Receptacles
Elevation *(A.F.F.)
4'0"
1'6"
Equipment or Outlets Elevation *(A.F.F.)
Flow/Level Transmitters
5'5"
Circular Chart Recorder
5'5"
Motor starters
5'0"
Control stations
4'0"
Manual starters
5'0"
Thermostats in office areas
4'0"
Telephone outlets
1'6"
Circuit protective devices
6'6" to top of
enclosure
* Above Finished Floor.
D. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate
locations and sizes of required access doors in accordance with other sections of the
specifications.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6" separation, except provide
minimum 24" separation in acoustic-rated walls.
B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate
masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes.
C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.
D. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one (1) device is installed together; do not use
sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems.
E. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.
F. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition
studs, position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush
outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet
boxes.
G. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices.
END OF SECTION
Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.03-2
DRP09328

26 05 33.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pull and junction boxes.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for sizing all pull boxes and junction boxes per the
National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 314 and all other relevant sections of the NEC. Electrical
work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
ELECTRICAL.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Appleton
B. Bryant
C. Crouse Hinds
D. Hoffman
E. Hubbell
F. O Z Gedney
G. Raco
H. Rob Roy
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include the
following shop drawings:
A. Pull and Junction Boxes
1.04 STANDARDS
The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety:
NEMA 250
ANSI/NEMA OS 1
NEC
Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum)
Sheet steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports
National Electrical Code
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. GENERAL: Exposed wall recessed pull and junction boxes shall be NEMA 1 steel for Air
Conditioned spaces, NEMA 12 steel for ventilated areas, NEMA 3R for exterior locations and
NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for corrosive areas. Exposed pull boxes or junction boxes
installed outdoors, per NEMA 250 shall be weatherproof and shall be provided with watertight
gasketed covers fastened with stainless steel screws and be steel. All hardware shall be
steel. Boxes shall be provided with integral mounting lugs.
B. NEMA 1 (metallic) for Air Conditioned spaces, NEMA 12 for ventilated areas, NEMA 3R for
exterior locations and NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for corrosive areas.
Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.04-1
DRP09328

C. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: Metal construction conforming to National Electrical Code
and ANSI/NEMA OS 1 with a hinged cover and quick release stainless steel luggage type
clasp. Provide hinge type for boxes of 12" or larger in any dimension. Boxes shall be
provided with integral mounting lugs.
D. FLUSH-MOUNTED PULL BOXES: Provide overlapping covers with flush-head cover
retaining screws.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Use separate pull boxes and junction boxes for electric power, control and communication
systems.
B. Install pull boxes and junction boxes where required by the National Electrical Code and
wherever required to overcome mechanical difficulties.
C. Install pull boxes in interior conduit at not more than 100' apart when conduit runs are not
broken by junction or outlet boxes.
D. Pull and junction boxes shall be accessible and not buried.
E. Do not install boxes back to back in walls and provide a minimum of 6" separation, except in
acoustic-rated walls, provide 24" separation.
F. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that is connected to two rigid
metal conduits, both supported within 12" of box.
G. Junction boxes shall have terminal strips/distribution blocks for splicing conductors where
approved by the ENGINEER or as shown/specified on the plans. Terminal strips shall be
manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Phoenix Contact or approved equal. Distribution blocks shall
be per Section 26 05 19.01, WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES.
END OF SECTION
Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.04-2
DRP09328

26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Section Includes:
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Identification for raceways.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Product Data to include cut sheets for each electrical identification product to be used on the
project. Provide example of labeling for Owner/Engineer approval prior to beginning any
work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, are not acceptable.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures
as follows:
1. Tags relying on adhesives or tapes-on markers are not acceptable.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 1
DRP09328

2. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent
sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS
sleeves or approved equal.
3. Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AVWG and larger consisting of permanent
nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach
these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be
Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal.
4. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number (e.g. LA3-23)
for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with
the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1).
5. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an “S” suffix.
Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a “T” suffix.
6. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be applied
to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g.
HA-2, 4, 6).
2.02 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by
1 to 2 inches wide.
2.03 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed
to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE
2.04 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 2
DRP09328

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT
OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
2.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Attach
plates to equipment with stainless steel screws. Adhesive attachment is only acceptable on
NEMA 4X enclosures.
2.06 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
A. A conduit identification plate shall be installed on all power, control and instrumentation conduits
at the end of each run and at the conduit ends inside intermediate junction and pull
boxes, manholes, handholes, etc. Conduit plates shall be installed before conductors are
pulled into the conduits. Exact identification plate location shall be coordinated with the
Owner/Engineer at the time on installation. The conduit identification tags shall identify the
cable numbers as shown on the FNI plans and the “to” and “from” information. Coordinate
with Owner for exact requirements for plate material and type. Provide an example to Owner/Engineer
as a formal submittal for approval prior to the installation.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with stainless steel mechanical
fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line
warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple
tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope]exceeds 16 inches overall.
G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface
preparation and paint application.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the
phase.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 3
DRP09328

1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded
service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG
b. Colors for 208/120-V or 240V/120V, 3-phase Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral: White
1) Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green
c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum
distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are
made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.
Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
B. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,
communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
C. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive
warning labels
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
D. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance
of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with
approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
E. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units,
control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include
power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless
equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: stainless steel screws and nuts, engraved and laminated nameplates.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters
on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches
high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 4
DRP09328

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate
mechanical fasteners and gaskets that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating
of the enclosure and void the U.L. listing of the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard
manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be laminated acrylic or melamine label
and placed in a clear plastic sleeve.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Switchgear.
d. Switchboards.
e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer,
feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
f. Motor-control centers.
g. Enclosed switches.
h. Enclosed circuit breakers.
i. Enclosed controllers.
j. Push-button stations.
k. Contactors.
l. Monitoring and control equipment.
m. UPS equipment.
n. Conduits
END OF SECTION
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 5
DRP09328

NO TEXT FOR THIS PAGE
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 6
DRP09328

26 05 73.01 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
General: This section specifies that the CONTRACTOR prepare a short circuit and relay coordination
study and an arc flash hazard analysis for the electrical power system as shown on the plans.
Short Circuit and Relay Coordination Study, Arc Flash Analysis
The studies shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power system and the model numbers and
settings of the protective relays or devices and metering or motor monitoring devices for setting by the
CONTRACTOR. The Studies shall include settings for all motor protective relays and electric system
monitoring.
A. Scope:
1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all pertinent information necessary for the
successful completion of the Short Circuit and Relay Coordination Study and Arc Flash
Analysis. All cable and raceway data, data for existing motors, data from all new Switchgear,
motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, and separately mounted fuses, starters or
circuit breakers shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. Obtain all existing or new
protective device information to include all present settings. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain
any needed data or information from Contract Documents, various suppliers, the Electric
Utility and from conducting his own field investigations. The data obtained shall be organized
and submitted to the ENGINEER to show that all the necessary data gathering work has
been done.
2. Calculations shall utilize actual X/R and three phase short circuit values obtained by the
CONTRACTOR from the Electric Utility. The use of infinite bus fault current calculation is not
acceptable.
3. The studies shall model the electrical distribution system feeding the building all the way back
to the Utility owned transformer. Contractor shall include all loads normally fed from the utility
owned transformer.
4. Provide a complete short circuit study. Include three phase and phase-to-ground
calculations. Provide an equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on the actual
equipment and model numbers provided on this project. Generic devices are not acceptable.
Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations that could result in
maximum fault conditions shall be thoroughly addressed in the study. The study shall assume
all motors operating at rated voltage with the exception that motors identified as "standby"
shall not be included. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed zero. Short
circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum
available fault current at the electrical equipment busses. The Study shall be performed
using actual available short circuit currents available and system impedances as obtained
from the Electric Utility. An assumption of infinite bus for the purposes of the Study is not
acceptable. Study shall use actual motor X/R and subtransient reactance data obtained from
equipment suppliers.
Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-1
DRP09328

5. A relay coordination study shall be performed to determine appropriate relay settings. The
study shall include all electrical equipment provided under this contract and any up-stream
equipment that has an impact on the coordination study. The study shall show transformer
damage curves, generator damage curves, cable short circuit withstand curves and motor
curves. Include all medium and low voltage switchgear, distribution switchboards, motor
control centers, starters, and panelboards main circuit breakers. Complete the short circuit
study down to the main breaker or main lugs on all panelboards. Panelboard branch circuit
devices need not be considered. The phase over current and ground-fault protection shall be
included as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. All motor monitoring
relays and protective or monitoring devices that are a part of a supplier’s equipment (such as
soft starters, switchgear) shall be in included. Include the last protective device in the Electric
Utility’s system feeding each facility being considered.
6. Provide Time-Current Curves on 11X17 log-log paper. Do not put more than one branch of
protective devices on any one coordination curve. Include a one-line diagram and the names
of each protective device in the branch. Use the names designated in the Contract
Documents. Include motor and transformer damage curves, and cable short circuit
withstand curves. Coordination study time-current curves (11x17 log-log type) including the
instrument transformer ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, and the relay settings
associated with each breaker. Organize the curves as specified here in. Ground fault time
current curves shall be on a separate sheet.
7. An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of the fault
bracing of all bus from the panelboard level up to the main Panelboard or protective device.
Include circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busway, switches, and fuses by
tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault
currents.
8. Provide arc flash hazard analysis in accordance with the applicable NFPA, ANSI, and IEEE
standards.
9. The studies shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer
licensed in the state of Texas.
10. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment shall be promptly brought to the
ENGINEER's attention.
11. Use industry standard short circuit software, SKM CAPTOR and DAPPER or an equal
approved by the ENGINEER.
12. The report shall include a comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the interrupting
capacity of the equipment that is protecting that bus.
13. The report shall include all data that was used as input to the report. This data shall include
cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment ratings, motor X/R and
subtransient reactance data, etc.
14. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the OWNER for electrical data required for the
studies.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this Section as
specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of
the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
IEEE 141
Title
Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial
Plants
IEEE 242
NFPA 70E
Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems
Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-2
DRP09328

IEEE 1584
NEC
IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations
National Electrical Code
1.03 SCHEDULE
A. The report shall be provided to the ENGINEER NO LATER THAN 60 days before the equipment
is shipped to the Work site. SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE
ACCEPTED AT THE JOBSITE UNTIL THE STUDY HAS BEEN COMPLETED, SUBMITTED
AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Short Circuit and Relay Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type
paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a
supplement but not as a replacement.
B. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis
1. Provide a copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, disconnect, including
all existing electrical equipment –starters, panelboards, etc.
2. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, disconnect,
motor control centers, transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment –
panelboards, starters, etc.
3. Provide a 11x17 copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges &
clothing classifications at each bus. Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each
incident range & clothing classification. The following is a recommended color coding for the
following Hazard/Risk Category numbers:
a. Green to indicate a Category 0
b. Blue to indicate a Category 1
c. Brown to indicate a Category 2
d. Yellow to indicate a Category 3
e. Orange to indicate a Category 4
f. Red to indicate Above a Category 4
C. Provide six (6) bound color copies of the completed short circuit and relay coordination study,
the arc flash analysis shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Each hard copy of
studies shall be bound in a 3-ring binder.
D. Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on
a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to
develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the
written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the
power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the
OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc. for
the power system analysis.
Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-3
DRP09328

2.00 EXECUTION
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide a short-circuit and relay coordination study load flow and motor starting study, and arc
flash hazard analysis on the electrical power distribution system, as specified. The studies shall
be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242, IEEE 1584, ANSI, and the NEC
and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010.
The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for all equipment. The coordination
studies shall use the data from the manufacturer of protective devices.
2.02 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The studies shall be performed by the by an electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical
testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional
Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal
and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in
the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER’s seal will not be
reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit.
2.03 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all data needed to perform
the study.
B. As a minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following:
1. One-Line Diagram:
a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, directacting
trips, fuses, etc.
b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog
number for all protective devices.
c. Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all
transformers. Use the ratings (ie. Impedence, X/R, etc.) of the actual transformers being
provided where available.
d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay.
e. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their subtransient reactances.
Transient reactances of synchronous motors and generators and synchronous
reactances of all generators. Obtain data on the actual equipment being provided.
Generic or average data numbers are not acceptable.
f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors, and
induction motors. Provide short circuit studies using each source of power separately.
The study shall determine if there is sufficient short circuit current to adequately cause
interruption of a protective device using the weaker power source (typically local
generation), and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt the fault if the
greater power source is connected. Additional short circuit calculations shall include
emergency as well as normal switching conditions as well as normal and emergency
power sources described here in.
1) Show short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus. Provide the
same data in tabular from.
g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors,
etc shall be included.
h. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips, if applicable.
Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-4
DRP09328

2. Impedance Diagram:
a. Available MVA or impedance from the utility company.
b. Local generated capacity impedance.
c. Bus impedance.
d. Transformer and/or reactor impedances.
e. Cable impedances.
f. Equipment impedances.
g. System voltages.
h. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solidly grounding, or no grounding).
i. Motor contribution assuming the new and existing motors as shown on the plans all
running at the same time.
3. Calculations:
a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest.
Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each
case.
b. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents.
c. A discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment method of
calculation and formulas used such that all calculations can be verified manually by the
ENGINEER, with recommendations as required for improvements to the system.
d. Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the ENGINEER and recommendation
made for improvements.
e. Six (6) bound copies of the completed short circuit study shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER.
2.04 RELAY COORDINATION STUDY
A. As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the
following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper:
1. The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with aid of a digital computer.
a. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum
selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing, but still maintain a low
incident energy level. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be
notified as to the cause.
2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to
minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved,
the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause.
3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage.
4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times.
5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph.
6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement.
7. Six (6) bound copies of the completed relay coordination study shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER.
2.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. The study shall be performed in accordance with the NEC and all applicable OSHA, ANSI, and
IEEE standards.
Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-5
DRP09328

B. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust all adjustable time-current devices such that the trip settings
lower the arc flash exposure and minimizing the clearing time. However, the CONTRACTOR
shall adjust the time-current devices to avoid nuisance tripping.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize fault current values from the short circuit analysis to determine
the Incident energy, limited approach boundary, restricted approach boundary, prohibited
approach boundary and appropriate PPE required.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide project specific arc-flash labeling. The arc-flash labeling shall
be placed on the outside of the cover of the switchgear, motor control centers, combination motor
starters, panelboard, switchboard, distribution panel, and all electrical panels, etc. such that it can
be read without opening the electrical equipment. Mount arc-flash labels a maximum of 6’-6” AFF,
include the housekeeping pad in the mounting height. The CONTRACTOR shall provide arcflash
labeling on all existing panelboards, switchboards, distribution panel, etc. where breakers
are added or work is performed in or on the electrical equipment.
E. Arc Flash Labels shall be chemical resistant, UV resistant, water resistant, scratch resistant, and
made of 3.0 mil vinyl tape as manufactured by DuraLabel, Brady or approved equal. The lettering
shall be performed by thermal transfer print.
1. Arc Flash labels and label lettering shall be sized large enough to be legible at a distance
outside the hazard area.
2. Arc Flash Labels shall be placed on the door(s) of the room if the hazard area reaches or
extends beyond the electrical room door(s).
3. The arc flash label shall include a DANGER header when the incident energy is above
40cal/cm 2 , and a WARNING header for all other incident energy levels.
F. To ensure a safe workplace, and that the labeling meets NEC, OSHA, IEEE, and NFPA
requirements, use specialized arc flash software to calculate protection boundaries. These
protection boundaries shall include the Flash Protection Boundary, Limited Approach Boundary,
Restricted Approach Boundary and the Prohibited Approach Boundary.
G. The arc-flash analysis shall be based on calculated fault from the Short Circuit Study at each
respective bus. The arc-flash software program shall be used to calculate the available arcing
fault at each bus in the system, the resultant flash protection boundary based on the applicable
protective device operating times and the associated incident energy that workers may be
exposed to at the specified working distances.
H. The report shall include the following information: Arc-flash evaluation table, arc-flash and shock
hazard label definitions, arc-flash evaluation information, arc-flash and shock hazard labels and
definitions of terms used in the arc-flash hazard analysis.
I. Six (6) bound copies of the completed arc-flash hazard analysis shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER’s Representative.
Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-6
DRP09328

J. Arc Flash labels shall be similar to the following example:
END OF SECTION
Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-7
DRP09328

26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1. Time switches.
2. Outdoor photoelectric switches.
3. Lighting contactors.
4. Emergency shunt relays.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual light switches.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light-emitting diode.
B. PIR: Passive infrared.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates
ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 1
DRP09328

1. Intermatic, Inc.
2. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
4. Touch-Plate, Inc.
5. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten, to operate connected
relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.
1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels
within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light
sources from causing turn-off.
2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2,
and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations.
4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.
2.02 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Lighting controllers shall be microprocessor based and include integral astronomic clock and
calendar function and provide individual schedules for each day of the week. Relays shall
respond individually to any of 99 possible schedule events, including a special holiday
schedule that shall have provision for 32 user entered dates. Each schedule event shall have
pattern switching capability by providing for both ON and OFF commands for any
combination of relays. Controllers that require individual schedule events for ON and OFF are
not acceptable. Provide for user selection of automatic daylight savings time adjustment or
standard time.
B. Program entry shall be via an integral keypad and illuminated 4-line, 80-character LCD
display. The keypad shall provide individual quick-access keys that are associated with each
input, each relay, and each day of the week. Programming steps shall be prompted on the
display in clear alphanumeric format in such a way as to guide the user through set-up
procedure. An automatic context specific help function shall activate automatically after 30
seconds of keypad inactivity. While in the help mode, the display shall provide information
about the next input step required by the controller.
C. All programming shall be stored in non-volatile memory with clock settings backed up against
loss of power by a battery rated for ten years. The program shall incorporate a warn-beforeoff
feature that will flash the lighting to warn occupants of an impending OFF. The time delay
between the WARN and the OFF shall be user selectable between one and 99 minutes.
D. Provide eight low voltage input terminals suitable for connection of switches, occupancy
sensors or other override devices. Each shall support three-wire momentary, two-wire
momentary or two-wire maintained contact closures, and shall be assignable to any
combination of relays through the program. Inputs shall include a selectable time-out feature
with provision for automatic time-out and reset of the input. The time-out period shall be user
settable between 1 to 999 minutes. While active, each input shall provide a Class 2 voltage
source suitable for illuminating switch pilot lights.
E. An input masking feature shall allow for automatically disabling selected switch inputs for
programmed periods of time. During a masked period, activation of the switch shall not affect
the status of the relays. At the duration of the prescribed time period, the switch shall
automatically resume normal operation.
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 2
DRP09328

F. A dedicated photocell input shall allow connection of a remote analog photocell. The ON/OFF
set points and dead band settings for photocell operation shall be adjustable through the
program and not require adjustments at the remote photocell location. The controller shall
provide for setting individual photocell set points for all relays.
G. Relays shall be single-pole 20A rated for 10,000A SCCR or 2-pole 30A rated as scheduled.
Each controller shall have provision for a maximum of eight single-pole relays or four singlepole
and two 2-pole relays. While in operation, the current status of each relay shall be
displayed and visible to the user with the enclosure access door closed. A service override
switch shall be located within the enclosure and provide positive ON or OFF override of all
relays.
H. The enclosure shall be NEMA 1 rated construction with a hinged locking door and shall
provide separate compartments for line and low voltages. A screw-down cover shall further
restrict access to the high voltage compartment.
I. Lighting controller shall be SwitchPak relay panel manufactured by Synergy Lighting Controls
or approved equal.
2.03 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Wall Mounted combination switch and occupancy sensors
1. Sensors combine ultrasonic (US) and passive infrared (PIR) technologies for occupancy
detection and false trip immunity. With selectable operating modes—automatic ON/OFF
or manual ON/automatic OFF—and a built-in photosensor for automatic daylight
harvesting. Wall Mounted combination switch and occupancy sensors shall be Hubbell
LightHAWK LHMTS or approved equal.
2. Features
a. All-digital dual technology (ultrasonic [US] and passive infrared [PIR]) sensor
b. Self-adaptive technology – no manual adjustment required
c. Auto-on and manual-on operating modes (depending on model)
d. 1,000 square-foot, 180° coverage area
e. Built-in photocell
f. lens
g. Dual 120/277 VAC operation
h. No minimum load requirement
i. Zero Arc Point Switching
2.04 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not
smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller
than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 3
DRP09328

3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne
vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration
isolators.
3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpowerlimited
conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric sensors at each sensor.
B. Label contactors with a unique designation.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.
B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.
END OF SECTION
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 4
DRP09328

26 24 16 LIGHTING AND BRANCH PANELBOARDS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install lighting and branch
panelboards. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Panelboards shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers:
A. General Electric
B. Eaton Cutler-Hammer
C. Square D
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Shop Drawings:
a. Bill of Material
b. Front Elevation with dimensions
c. Assembly ratings including short circuit ratings, continuous current and voltage
d. Cable terminal sizes
e. Cut sheet on circuit breakers
1.04 STANDARDS
Circuit breakers, molded case, and branch circuit shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions of the following standards as if written here in their entirety:
A. Fed. Spec. W-C-375
B. NEMA AB1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their application.
C. NEMA PB1 Panelboards
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Equipment shall be protected from damage.
1.06 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 or later certified.
Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 24 16-1
DRP09328

B. Manufacturer shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five
(5) years. When requested by the engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar
equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall consist of a box, front, interior and circuit protective devices and shall be
manufactured in accordance with NEMA PB1 and bearing the applicable U.L. labels.
B. Panelboards shall be four wire, three phase as scheduled or required. Panelboards shall be
NEMA 1 for air conditioned spaces, NEMA 12 Steel for ventilated areas and NEMA 3R for
exterior locations and suitable for surface mounting. Panelboards shall contain sequence
style busing and full capacity neutral, composed of an assembly of bolt-on, molded case,
automatic breakers with thermal and an instantaneous, magnetic trip in each pole and a tripfree
position separate from either the "On" and the "Off" positions. Two (2) and three (3) pole
circuit breakers shall simultaneously open all poles. Circuit breakers, molded case and
branch circuits shall be in accordance with Fed. Spec. W-C-375.
C. The voltage rating, phase, number of wires and ampere rating shall be as indicated and
scheduled on the plans.
D. The panelboard box shall be fabricated of code gauge, galvanized sheet steel in accordance
with U.L. standards and have turned edges around the front for rigidity and frontal clamping.
Provide standard knockouts on the panel enclosures.
E. The panelboard front shall be fabricated of sheet steel and finished with a baked on gray
enamel over a rust inhibitor. Each front shall have a door mounted on semi-concealed hinges
with a cylinder lock, an index card and a card holder. Panelboard locks shall be master
keyed, with two (2) keys furnished for each panel board. Index cards shall be properly
typewritten.
F. The interior of the panelboard shall consist of a factory-assembled, rigid frame supporting the
rectangular bus, the mains and the neutral bar.
G. Busings shall be tin-plated copper and arranged for sequential phasing throughout. The bus
bar shall be sized so that the temperature rise is limited in accordance with NEMA standards.
The insulated neutral bar shall be located at the opposite end of the structure from the mains.
H. Panelboards shall have either solderless lugs or a main circuit protective device as
scheduled. Each enclosure shall have grounding lugs and uninsulated equipment grounding
terminals.
2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers.
B. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt in type. Series rating of breakers is not acceptable.
C. Single pole circuit breakers serving fluorescent lighting loads shall have the SWD marking.
Circuit breakers serving air conditioning branch loads shall be U.L. listed as type HACR.
Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 24 16-2
DRP09328

D. Each circuit breaker used in 208Y/120 Volt and 120/240V Panelboards shall have an
interrupting capacity of not less than 42,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical.
E. Circuit breakers shall be manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer.
F. The panelboard and circuit breaker interrupting capacities and rating shall be equal to or
greater than the fault currents available to each panelboard. Series rating of breakers shall
not be permitted.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Install the panelboard in accordance with applicable codes at each location indicated on the plans.
Provide filler plates for unused spaces in the panelboard. All labeling shall be in accordance to
Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.
END OF SECTION
Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 24 16-3
DRP09328

NO TEXT FOR THIS PAGE
Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 24 16-4
DRP09328

26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wiring devices. Electrical
work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
ELECTRICAL.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Products shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell
2. Leviton
3. Pass & Seymour
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Shop Drawings for Wiring Devices: Cut sheets of all devices indicating model being provided,
NEMA configuration, rating, color, etc.
1.04 STANDARDS
The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in its entirety:
NEMA WD-1
NEMA WD-6
UL 943
NFPA 70
General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices
Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements
Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters
National Electrical Code
Wiring Devices 26 27 26-1
DRP09328

2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. WALL SWITCHES: For general use, totally enclosed industrial type, specification grade,
rated for 120/277 VAC and 20 amps. Approved wire connection to switches shall consist of
inserting wire into back wiring hole and tightening terminal screw until wire is tightly griped by
clamping mechanism inside switch body. Side wiring shall not be allowed. Switches installed
in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type in accordance with the NEC.
B. MOTOR RATED SWITCHES: HP rated switches approved for motor control or disconnect
service when controlling or disconnecting motor loads in excess of 1/4 HP; 20 amp switches
for loads exceeding 10 amps.
C. WEATHERPROOF SWITCHES: Fitted with a single switch as specified, and weatherproof
cover with spring door cover; gray in color for all areas.
D. RECEPTACLES: For general use shall be U.L. approved, hospital grade heavy duty duplex
grounding type 20 ampere 125 volt heavy duty phosphor bronze contacts. Terminal screws
shall be large head, deep slotted #8-32 brass, backed out, staked and spring latched for rapid
wiring, color coded for polarity identification, and shall accept up to 10 AWG wire. Approved
wire connection to receptacles shall consist of inserting wire into back wiring hole and
tightening terminal screw until wire is tightly gripped by clamping mechanism inside the
receptacle body. Side wiring shall not be allowed.
E. GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING, INDOOR: GFCI receptacle shall include visible
indication of ground fault condition. Feed-through feature shall not be used. Install GFCI
device at each location indicated. GFCI circuit breaker shall not be permitted.
F. WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES:
1. Weatherproof receptacles shall be hospital grade, 20 ampere, 125 volt and shall be listed
as weather resistant type in accordance with the National Electrical Code and shall
include a weatherproof device cover.
a. Weatherproof Duplex Receptacle: Provide GFCI duplex receptacle with weatherproof
cover.
b. Weatherproof Single Receptacle: Provide a cast box fitted with a single receptacle
and threaded cap with a weatherproof cover.
2. Weatherproof device covers shall have a NEMA 3R rating while receptacle is in use rating
with die cast aluminum construction as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Model No.
CKMUV or approved equal.
G. WEATHER RESISTANT RECEPTACLES: Weather resistant receptacles shall be listed as
weather resistant type in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
H. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE COVER PLATES: The cover plate color shall be gray for all
areas, unless otherwise indicated or required by the NEC. Screw heads shall have color to
match plate. Non-weatherproof; 302/304 stainless steel. Provide telephone cover plates
which are the same as above, except with a single bushed pole for the telephone cable.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Wiring Devices 26 27 26-2
DRP09328

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
D. Existing Conductors:
E. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
F. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
G. Pigtailing existing conductors is required. Outlet boxes shall be oversized to allow pigtailing.
H. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess
building materials, dirt and debris.
I. Install switches, wall-mounted duplex receptacles and telephone outlets at the heights
specified in Section 26 05 33.03, OUTLET BOXES, unless indicated otherwise on the plans.
J. Switches installed at one (1) location shall be ganged together under one (1) cover plate.
END OF SECTION
Wiring Devices 26 27 26-3
DRP09328

26 28 00 LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidents to install overcurrent protective devices.
Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
ELECTRICAL.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include Record
Data for:
A. Fuses
B. Circuit Breakers
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. FUSES: Current-limiting with 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes interrupting rating and U.L.
listed, manufactured by Bussmann, Ferraz Shawmut or Littlefuse. All fuses shall be by the
same Manufacturer. Fuses which are 600 amperes and smaller shall be Class RK1, dual
element, and have separated overload and short-circuit elements. The overload, time delay
element shall be spring-activated and utilize a eutectic alloy with a 284 degrees F. melting
point. The fuse shall hold 500% of its rated fuse current for a minimum of 10 seconds.
B. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Bolt-on, thermal magnetic circuit breakers with the number of poles
and the ampere rating as indicated on the plans; capable of interrupting the symmetrical fault
current available to them; manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric or Square D.
Series rating of breakers shall not be permitted. Circuit breakers installed in existing
equipment shall match make, manufacturer and AIC rating of existing equipment where being
installed.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in switches as scheduled. Install fuses on the line side of ballast-controlled light
fixtures when indicated. The fuses shall be sized by the fixture Manufacturer.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, mount the protective devices with the top of the cabinet or
enclosure at a maximum of 6'-6" above the finished floor. Properly align the protective
devices and adequately support them independently of the connecting raceways. Furnish and
install all components necessary for the support of the equipment when the building is not
suitable for direct mounting upon it.
C. Install overcurrent devices in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
END OF SECTION
Low Voltage Protective Devices 26 28 00-1
DRP09328

26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install disconnects. Electrical
work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
ELECTRICAL.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Disconnects shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers:
A. Eaton Cutler-Hammer
B. General Electric
C. Square D
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Disconnects
1.04 STANDARDS
The applicable provisions shall apply as if written here in their entirety:
ANSI/UL - 198E
NEMA RS1
Fed. Spec. FS-WS-865
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. DISCONNECT SWITCHES: Class "R" or non-fusible; of the required ampere rating, or as
indicated on the plans; heavy duty, quick-make, quick-break, 3-phase, 3-pole switches, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. ENCLOSURES: NEMA 1 for air conditioned spaces, NEMA 12 for ventilated areas, NEMA
3R for exterior locations and NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for corrosive areas. Furnish
enclosures with interlocking covers with maintenance defeat feature and external frontoperated
flange-mounted switch levers. Disconnects shall have provisions for the use of
three (3) safety padlocks in the "Off" position. Furnish horsepower rated switches for motor
circuits. The fuse interrupting rating shall be 65,000 rms amperes.
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 28 16-1
DRP09328

3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Install disconnect switches as required by the National Electrical Code. Install fuses in fusible
disconnect switches.
END OF SECTION
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 28 16-2
DRP09328

26 29 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLLUDED
A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to install combination motor starters.
Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Enclosed Controllers shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers:
1. Allen Bradley
2. Eaton Cutler-Hammer
3. General Electric
4. Square D
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in and
marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Coordinate with equipment suppliers for actual motor data – HP, voltage, amps, etc, to properly
size controller (starter) and overloads.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
A. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and
service spaces around controller enclosures.
2. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, and enclosure types and finishes. Data sheets shall clearly identify the make and
model number of the equipment being provided.
3. Show tabulations of the following:
a. Each installed unit's type and details.
b. Factory-installed devices.
c. Nameplate legends.
d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices in combination controllers.
f. Project specific wiring diagrams/control schematics: For power, signal, and control
wiring.
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 1
DRP09328

g. Project specific layout of front of controller clearly indentifying the location of all panel
mounted devices.
h. Terminal strip layout clearly showing all field connections.
B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain the shop drawings, submittals, spare
parts lists, schematics, and maintenance procedures.
2. Manuals shall also incorporate appropriate final certified shop drawings. Manuals may
be manufacturer's standard instructions, but shall be supplemented as necessary to
cover any special feature not included in standard material.
3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reducedvoltage
solid-state controllers.
C. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed,
and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load
currents.
D. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have
been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload
protection suit actual motors to be protected.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent
condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive
substances, and physical damage.
B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather,
dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable
materials from inside controllers.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not
exceeding 122 deg F (50 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
B. HORSEPOWER RATING: Horsepowers as indicated on the Plans are approximate. The
Contractor shall furnish properly sized motor control equipment when actual motor horsepowers
are determined. If actual motor horsepowers differ from the Plans, the Contractor
shall obtain assistance from the Engineer in determining whether or not hardware and wiring
changes are necessary. The Contractor shall provide all components and wire of the proper
size.
C. OPERATING VOLTAGE: The equipment shall be designed and arranged for operation on
208 Volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz or 120V, 60 Hertz. See plans for more details.
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 2
DRP09328

D. CONTROL POWER: Control power shall be 120 VAC from a control transformer located in
each combination starter. Extra control transformer VA capacity shall be furnished for powering
the motor space heater in the motor which the combination starter serves. This extra VA
capacity shall be in addition to the VA required for the other control components powered by
the control transformer. The following is the amount of extra VA capacity which shall be furnished:
COMBINATION
NEMA SIZE
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
EXTRA VA CAPACITY
size 1 100
size 2 200
size 3 300
size 4 500
size 5 750
size 6 1000
This extra VA capacity shall be furnished in each combination starter regardless of where the
motor space heater received its power and regardless of whether the motor has a space
heater or not.
E. INTERRUPTING RATING: Both circuit breakers and combination starters as complete units
shall be rated for 42,000 Amps Interrupting Capacity (AIC).
F. ENCLOSURES: NEMA 12, 14 gauge steel for interior locations and NEMA 4X, 304 stainless
steel for all other locations.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including
conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances
and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
1.08 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish spare parts that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering
for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,
but no fewer than two of each size and type.
2. Indicating Lights: One of each type and color installed.
2.01 COMBINATION STARTER
A. The combination starter shall include a motor circuit protector (MCP) type circuit breaker or a
thermal magnetic type circuit breaker as indicated on the Plans. MCP's shall be magnetic trip
only with adjustable magnetic trip limited to 1300% of motor nameplate full load current to
comply with NEC requirements. Devices shown on the schematic and not specifically designated
as being elsewhere shall be installed inside the combination starter.
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 3
DRP09328

B. Combination starter doors shall be interlocked mechanically with the circuit breaker operator
mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the door while the circuit breaker is in the
closed position. The circuit breaker operator mechanism shall be mounted on the stationary
part of the enclosure and not on the door of the enclosure. The circuit breaker operator mechanism
shall indicate "ON" and "OFF" with the door open or closed. The circuit breaker
shall be manually operated, resettable after trip from the operator mechanism handle. The
operating handle shall clearly indicate whether the circuit breaker is "ON" or "OFF", or
"TRIPPED". Means shall be provided to lock each operator mechanism handle in the "OFF"
position and to close the door. Means shall be provided for releasing the interlock for intentional
access to the interior at any time and intentional application of power, if desired, while
door is open. Padlocking arrangements shall permit locking the disconnect device "OFF" with
at least three padlocks with door closed or open.
C. The combination starter shall have a magnetic starter contactor. The magnetic starter contactor
shall be NEMA rated and NEMA 1 magnetic starter contactors shall be the minimum
size allowed. Magnetic starter contactors shall have renewable contacts and a renewable
coil which shall allow each to be replaced without replacing other parts of the magnetic starter
contactor. Magnetic starter contactors shall have a maximum pick up voltage of 71% of nominal
coil voltage and a maximum drop out voltage of 59% of nominal coil voltage.
D. Each magnetic starter shall have three (3) external manual reset thermal overload relays of
either the bimetallic type or the melting alloy type. Overload relays shall be either ambient
compensated or ambient insensitive. Overload relay heaters shall be Class 10 for submersible
pump motors and hermetically sealed motors and shall be Class 20 for all other motors.
Overload relay heaters shall be selected to produce an overload trip at no more than the following
percent of the motor nameplate full load current rating:
Motors with a marked service factor not
less than 1.15 125%
Motors with a marked temperature rise of
not over 40°C 125%
All other motors 115%
E. Overload relays shall be reset from outside the enclosure with an insulated bar or button.
Auxiliary contacts shall be furnished on the circuit breaker operating mechanism, the starter
contactor and on the overload sensing unit as shown on the plans.
F. Controls and lights shall be heavy duty oiltight construction. Devices installed in the combination
starter or on the door of the combination starter shall be completely factory wired with
connections to external devices brought to a terminal strip installed in the starter. No field
wiring shall be permitted except for connections to remote devices from the terminal strip. A
physical wiring diagram shall be provided on each enclosure door and shall be protected to
remain intact and legible for the service life of the equipment. Control devices shall be identified
as to type and manufacturer.
G. Control relays, timing relays, control transformers, control circuit fuse blocks, etc., shall be
grouped in the corresponding combination starter with control wiring kept as short as possible.
Ample space shall be allowed between devices so that each component is completely
accessible without removing any other device.
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 4
DRP09328

H. Wiring in the combination starter shall terminate on numbered terminal strips or power distribution
blocks. No other wire connecting devices, including but not limited to wirenuts and
split bolts, shall be allowed in the combination starter. Each combination starter shall be provided
with an individual terminal strip for control wiring. Terminal strip metallic materials shall
be tinned copper. Power distribution blocks shall be tinned copper which is rated for termination
of copper conductors.
I. Combination starter control wiring shall be 14AWG. Power wiring shall have black insulation
and control wiring shall have purple insulation for ungrounded conductors and white insulation
for grounded conductors. Combination starter wiring shall have copper conductors with
MTW insulation only.
J. Where control transformers are indicated and unless shown otherwise, each starter shall contain
a 480 to 120 volt fused control transformer with sufficient capacity for all the devices
shown in the schematic. The control transformer shall have two (2) primary fuses, one in
each primary lead and one secondary fuse in one of the secondary leads. The unfused secondary
lead shall be grounded.
K. Each combination starter shall have an engraved plastic nameplate fastened to the outside of
the unit door. Engraved plastic nameplates shall have .33" high white letters on a black
background and attached with stainless steel screws. Wiring diagrams shall be provided on
the inside of each compartment door and shall be protected so that they remain attached and
legible for the service life of the equipment.
L. If any circuit breaker operating handle is more than 6'6" above the floor surface immediately
in front of the combination starter, a supplementary operating device shall be attached to the
operating handle. This supplementary device shall require a person to reach no more than
6'6" above the floor surface at any point of opening or closing the circuit breaker
2.02 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose,
Class A.
B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to
show whether unit is off or on.
1. Configuration:
2. Surface mounting.
3. Green push-to-test pilot light.
C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button
action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.
1. Configuration: Nonreversing
2. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 20 tripping
characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;
external reset push button: bimetallic type.
3. Surface mounting.
4. Not all manufacturers offer a green pilot light; pilot lights are not available in hazardous
and some cast-type enclosures.
D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button
action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 5
DRP09328

1. Configuration: Nonreversing.
2. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 20 tripping
characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full-load
current of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle;
external reset push button; bimetallic type
3. Surface mounting.
E. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.
1. Configuration: Nonrversing.
2. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.
a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating,
manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.
3. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to
allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.
4. Control Circuits: 120V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses
of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating,
and control devices.
a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.
5. Solid-State Overload Relay:
a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.
b. Sensors in each phase.
c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against
voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.
d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on
starting.
e. Analog communication module.
6. External overload reset push button.
F. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller,
overcurrent protective device, and disconnecting means.
1. MCP Disconnecting Means:
2.03 ACCESSORIES
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with
available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, fieldadjustable,
short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.
d. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to
42 kA.
A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in
controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 6
DRP09328

B. IEC or dual rated NEMA/IEC equipment shall not be acceptable.
C. CONTROL RELAYS: Industrial type; contacts rated for 10 amps at 600 VAC; Square D
Class 8501 Type X, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 700 type PK, or approved equal. Relays shall
have the capability of having contact decks added in the field. Contacts shall be field convertible
to normally open or normally closed. Coils and contacts shall each be replaceable
without replacing any other part of the relay. Where control relays are indicated on the Plans,
industrial control relays shall be furnished whether the relay coil is operated with 120 VAC or
24 VDC.
D. ELAPSED TIME METER: Yokogawa Type 240, or approved equal. The meter shall be of
the non-reset type for totalizing of hours and operating on 120 or 240 VAC, 60 Hertz.
E. INDICATING LIGHTS, SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS: Heavy duty and oil tight, Square
D Class 9001 (30.5 mm) or approved equal. Devices shall match or exceed the rating of the
enclosure. Indicating lights shall be push-to-test (cluster LED type) and shall be Square D
SKT or approved equal.
F. CONTROL TRANSFORMER: Included in combination starter units with sufficient VA capacity
for powering the devices shown in the control schematic; 208 to 120 volt transformer with a
fuse in each primary leg and one (1) fuse in the secondary leg. The unfused secondary leg
shall be grounded.
G. Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 4X enclosures
installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature
swings. Space heaters shall be thermostatically controlled and be power from internal power
inside the enclosure.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Make electrical connections to equipment specified. Install equipment in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations and the plans. If neither are available, install the equipment
using the best practices of the electrical industry and trade.
B. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height
unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structuralsteel
channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying
with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 7
DRP09328

D. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load
amperes after motors have been installed.
E. Comply with NECA 1.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring in accordance with Section 26
05 53, IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.
3. Externally visible, permanent nameplates shall be provided to identify each switch,
indicating light, etc. Equipment and terminal blocks shall be suitably identified. This shall
include items on the back side of doors and panel mounted items. Nameplates shall be
black with white lettering and attached with stainless steel screws.
3.04 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices.
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.
2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, hightemperature
cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of the installation, perform continuity tests and functional checkout to assure
the proper operation of all equipment.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test
and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.]
2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting
motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.
3. Test continuity of each circuit.
4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor
nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Contractor/Owner
before starting the motor(s).
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 8
DRP09328

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers
and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken and observations after remedial action.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay
pickup and trip ranges.
B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected
to the load side of the overload relays.
C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous
trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings
and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts.
If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping.
Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium
Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor,
notify Owner/Contractor before increasing settings.
D. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into
service.
B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 9
DRP09328

26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, design, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete
lightning protection system in accordance with UL 96A, NFPA 780, and this specification for
protection of the Parks and Recreation Facility at the Stevens Park site. Lightning protection
system shall be tied to existing and new grounding system as required.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The system furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and shall be the
manufacturer's latest approved design. Listing of the manufacturer in the lightning protection
section of the current edition of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Electrical Construction
Materials List will be accepted as compliance with this requirement.
B. All materials shall be copper and bronze and of the size, weight and construction to suit the
application where used in accordance with UL, NFPA, NEC code requirements for this type
structure and as per manufacturer's recommendations. Class I sized components may be
utilized on roof levels 75 feet and below in height. Class II sized components are required for
roof levels over 75 feet in height.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS, and shall include:
1. Specifications
2. Catalog Sheets for All Products Provided
3. Shop drawings showing type, size and location of all equipment, grounds, cable routings,
etc.
4. Continuity Test Report
5. Copy of U.L. Master Label for the Facility
1.04 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
A. Refer to Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL, for all standards
which apply to this section.
NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems
UL 96A
LPI 175
Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems
Lightning Protection Institute Standard of Practice
Lightning Protection For Structures 26 41 13-1
DRP09328

2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials used in connection with the installation of the lightning protection systems shall be
approved for lightning protection systems by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. No
combination of materials shall be used that form an electrolytic couple of such a nature that
corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded
from the junction of such metals. When unusual conditions exist which would cause
deterioration or corrosion of conductors, conductors with suitable protective coatings or
oversize conductors shall be used. If a mechanical hazard is involved, the conductor size
shall be increased to compensate therefore, or suitable protection shall be provided. The
conductors may be protected by covering them with molding or tubing preferably made of
wood or nonmagnetic material. If metal tubing is used, the conductor shall be electrically
connected to it at its upper and lower ends.
B. All equipment used shall be new and of a design and construction to suit the application in
accordance with UL 96A requirements and shall be so marked.
2.02 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. CONDUCTORS - Copper conductors manufactured of copper grade ordinarily required for
commercial electrical work generally designated as being 98 percent conductive when
annealed. Down conductors of copper cable for installations other than towers shall weigh not
less than 187.5 pounds per thousand feet and the size of any wire of this cable shall not be
less than No. 17 AWG (0.045 inch). Down conductors shall be tinned. The thickness of any
copper ribbon or strip shall be not less than No. 16 AWG (0.051 inch).
B. AIR TERMINALS - Air terminals shall be tapered to a blunt point. The rod shall be of solid
copper, 1/2 inch in diameter. Air terminals and support shall be designed over 24 inches to
handle a 75 pound per square foot wind load. All air terminals shall be supported by a
suitable brace, with guide(s) not less than one-half the height of the air terminal. Air terminals
shall be located in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 780 and UL 96A. Air terminals
shall extend at least ten inches above the object or area they are intended to protect. Air
terminals shall be placed around the perimeter of flat or gently sloping roofs at intervals not
exceeding 20 feet.
C. FASTENERS - Fasteners shall be of the same material as the conductor base material or
bracket being fastened, or other equally corrosion resistant material. Galvanized or plated
materials shall not be used.
D. FITTINGS - Fittings/bonding devices, cable splicers, and miscellaneous connectors shall be
suitable for use with the installed conductor and shall be copper, bronze or aluminum with bolt
pressure connections to the cable. Cast or stamped crimp type fittings shall not be used.
E. Aluminum material may be used where the installation of dissimilar metals creates problems.
The Contractor shall field verify all materials involved in the total installation and shall install
system in accordance with all applicable NFPA and U.L. codes and standards.
Lightning Protection For Structures 26 41 13-2
DRP09328

3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The Contract Drawings (shop drawings) shall indicate the extent and general arrangement of
the lightning protection system. If any departures from the Contract Drawings (shop
drawings) are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the
reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No such departures shall
be made without the prior written approval of the Engineer. Lightning protection systems for
all applications shall conform to National Fire Protection Association Code No. 780 and the
NEC, whichever is more stringent.
B. Installation shall be performed by a certified master installer. Installer shall provide an
Underwriters' Laboratories Master Label for the facilities.
C. Air terminals shall be provided on the highest projections and at intervals not exceeding 20
feet along the perimeter top surface. Air terminals shall extend at least 10 inches above the
object or area that they are intended to protect. Air terminals shall be connected to the
lightning protection system when so specifically authorized by the Engineer.
D. Roof and down conductors shall be stranded and shall meet the requirements given in NFPA
780. Roof and down conductors shall maintain a horizontal or downward course. No bend in
a roof or down conductor shall form an included angle of less than 90 degrees, nor shall it
have a bend radius of less than eight inches. Conductors shall be routed external to buildings
and six feet or more from power or signal conductors. Down conductors shall be routed
outside of any structure and shall not penetrate or invade that structure. All down conductors
except one may be provided with a screw type connector as described in UL 96 where
lightning protection system testing may be required. Down connectors shall be supported
from and secured to the building exterior using one hole straps of copper or bronze at
maximum intervals of three feet.
E. Guards shall be provided for down conductors located in or next to driveways, walkways or
other areas where they may be displaced or damaged. Guards shall extend at least six feet
above and one foot below grade level. Guards shall be metal pipe. Metal guards shall be
bonded to the down conductor at both ends. Bonding jumpers shall be of the same size as
the down conductor. Crimp type fittings shall not be used.
F. Metallic bodies, on or below roof level, that are subject to induced charges from lightning
include exhaust fans, radio towers, HVAC units, ladders, railings, antennas, roof drains,
plumbing, vents, metal coping, metal flashing, gutters, downspouts, small metal wall vents,
door and window frames, metal balcony railings, and in general any isolated metallic body
within six feet of an exposed lightning protection system element. When these metallic
bodies have a metal thickness of 3/16 inch or greater, they shall be bonded to the nearest
main lightning protection system conductor with UL approved fittings and conductors meeting
the requirements of NFPA 780. These bonding fittings shall provide surfaces of not less than
three square inches. Provisions shall be made to prevent corrosive effects introduced by
galvanic action of dissimilar metals at bonding points. If the metal parts of these units are
less than 3/16 inch thick, additional approved air terminals, conductors and fittings, providing
a two way path to ground from the air terminals shall be installed.
G. If metallic, the mast of roof mounted antennas and obstruction lightning shall be bonded to the
nearest roof or down conductor using UL approved fittings and conductors. The bonding
jumpers shall be of the same size and material as the roof or down conductor to which they
are connected. Provide two paths for ground.
Lightning Protection For Structures 26 41 13-3
DRP09328

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The lightning protection system will be inspected by the Engineer to determine conformance
with the requirements of this specification. No part of the system shall be concealed until so
authorized by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for the “Lightning Protection
System” installation to assure compliance with contract requirements, and shall maintain
records of his quality control for all construction operations. A copy of these records and
Contractor tests, as well as records of corrective action taken, shall be furnished to the Owner
as directed by the Engineer.
C. Contractor shall obtain an Underwriters' Laboratories Master Label for the facility.
1. Upon completion, an application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for
inspection and certification.
2. Cost for UL inspection and associated costs to obtain the UL Master Label shall be paid
for by the Contractor.
D. Testing of Continuity of all Conductors - A copy of these records and tests, as well as the
records of corrective action taken, shall be furnished to the Owner as directed by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Lightning Protection For Structures 26 41 13-4
DRP09328

26 50 00 LIGHTING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install light fixtures, complete
with lamps, ballasts and other incidentals. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26
05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Lamps shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers:
1. General Electric
2. Sylvania
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
1. Product data sheets
2. Performance curves for light fixtures
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Ship light fixtures inside protective cartons and keep packaged until installed. Deliver lamps to the
job site in the original packing cases and sleeves.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Provide cold weather ballasts in fixtures which are subject to temperatures below 32 degrees
F.
B. Provide special mounting, enclosures and fire-safing, as required by the authorities having
jurisdiction so that the integrity of the U.L. listed ceiling assembles is maintained.
C. Provide U.L. labels where fixtures are subject to moisture. Provide DL or WL label on fixtures
required for the location.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. PLASTIC LENS: Lens for fluorescent fixtures shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum thickness
of 0.125".
B. PHOTOCELL: Fully adjustable from two (2) to 50' candles with SPST contacts; rated 1500
watts at 120 VAC. Cells shall have a built in time delay of five (5) seconds.
C. BALLASTS: Ballast for fluorescent lamps shall be high power factor, dual protected, Class P,
one (1) or two (2) lamps as required, unless otherwise specified on the plans; manufactured
in accordance with CBM standards, ETL certified, U.L. approved, and sound rated "A";
protected by a built-in, resetting, thermal protector. Ballasts for high intensity discharge lamps
shall be high power factor, potted and encapsulated. The starting current shall not exceed the
running current. Ballast shall be compatible in design to the specified lamps. Fluorescent
ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance and by the manufacturer of the light fixture for Hi-
Intensity ballasts.
Lighting 26 50 00-1
DRP09328

D. LAMPS
1. FLUORESCENT: Cool white; rapid start, unless otherwise specified or indicated.
2. METAL HALIDE: Phosphor-coated, unless otherwise specified or indicated; selfextinguishing
type when the outer lamp envelope is broken.
E. EXIT LIGHTS: Single or double face unit as required for each location, with arrows to clearly
define the path of egress and which flash at a rate not exceeding five (5) hertz. Provide
battery-powered exit lights if the exits lights are not served with an emergency power source.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide the lighting fixtures, as specified and scheduled on the plans. If a type designation is
omitted, verify the fixture selection with the ENGINEER before installation.
B. Check the architectural finishes and provide fixtures with proper trim, frames, support hangers
and other hardware required to coordinate with the proper finishes, regardless of the specified
or scheduled catalog number, prefixes and suffixes.
C. Fixtures which are tandem-mounted and recessed in gypboard or plaster ceilings shall be
yoke-mounted.
D. Test and aim flood lights, when dark outside to provide a uniform and widespread, illuminated
area. Direct units as indicated or instructed by the ENGINEER to prevent objectionable glare.
E. Furnish and install photocells where indicated on the plans. Cells shall face a northerly
direction.
F. Furnish and install exit lights where scheduled and indicated on the plans. Locate fixtures on
the ceiling or wall, as required by the ENGINEER. Provide relays and the necessary wiring to
provide a flashing exit light system upon the activation of a fire alarm. Install exit lights in
accordance with Paragraph (Q)(2) of the Handicapped Accessibility Act of Texas.
G. Furnish and install a complete exterior lighting control system, as indicated on the plans.
Provide materials and equipment to properly interface timing devices and photocells with
relays and contactors so that a complete and satisfactory operating system is rendered.
3.02 CLEAN AND ADJUST
Immediately before final inspection, clean all fixtures, inside and out, including plastics and
glassware. Adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surfaces. Replace broken or damaged parts.
Lamp and test all fixtures for electrical, as well as, mechanical operation.
END OF SECTION
Lighting 26 50 00-2
DRP09328

31 05 13 EARTH FILL CLASSIFICATIONS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
This section of the specifications describes the various classes of Earth Fill. All of the classes of
Earth Fill contained in this specification may not be used on this project. The classes of Earth Fill
used on this project are shown on the drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications.
This specification section does not include specifications for placement and compaction of Earth
Fill. Specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill are included in other sections of the
specifications and/or shown on the drawings.
1.02 STANDARDS
Soil materials shall be classified into the appropriate class of Earth Fill shown below according to
ASTM D2487 "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System)" or other appropriate methods as designated by the Engineer.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS; CLASSIFICATIONS
A. CLASS 1 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a
liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a
minimum of 60% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials.
B. CLASS 2 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH and CL materials
with a coefficient of permeability less than or equal to 1.0 x 10 -7 cm/sec, a liquid limit greater
than or equal to 30, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 15, and more than 50% passing
the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials.
C. CLASS 3 EARTH FILL: Consist of any materials classified as CH, CL, SM, SP, SP-SM, SC,
and GC, which have a minimum plasticity index of 4, which are free of organic materials.
D. CLASS 4 EARTH FILL: Consist of materials which are classified as SP, SM, SC, CL, or dual
classifications thereof, which have a liquid limit less than or equal to 35 and a plasticity index
of a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 15, which are free of organic materials.
E. CLASS 5 EARTH FILL: Consist of materials classified as SP or SP-SM which have a
plasticity index less than or equal to 4 and a maximum of 12% passing the No. 200 sieve,
which are free of organic materials.
(Class 6 through Class 11 reserved)
F. CLASS 12 EARTH FILL: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones
or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support
vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Earth Fill Classifications 31 05 13-1
DPR09328

31 23 10 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete structural
excavation, filling, backfilling, and compacting; to provide protection to equipment and cuts; to
include backfill material; the construction or installation of cofferdams, and other similar
facilities which may be necessary to perform excavations and/or backfilling; to include the
necessary pumping, bailing, or associated drainage; to remove and dispose of surplus
materials, cofferdams, and debris; and to provide final grading, as required.
B. The work does not include excavation, filling, and backfilling for utility lines, manholes, vaults,
valve boxes, and related structures.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include:
1.03 STANDARDS
1. Submit qualifications of independent testing laboratory for approval.
2. Backfill material classifications. Provide certification by an approved independent testing
laboratory.
3. Compaction test results. Provide compaction test results within 24 hours.
A. The following publications, referred to hereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this
specification as if written herein in their entirety:
ASTM D698
ASTM D1556
ASTM D6938
ASTM D4253
ASTM D4254
Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft 3 (600 kN-m/m 3 ))
Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method
Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of
Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of
Soils Using a Vibratory Table
Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils
and Calculation of Relative Density
B. Any other testing required by these specifications and not specifically referenced to a
standard shall be performed under ASTM or other appropriate standards as designated by the
Engineer.
C. References herein or on the drawings to soil classifications shall be understood to be
according to ASTM D2487, “Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)" unless indicated otherwise.
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deposit material to be used for backfill in storage piles at points convenient for handling of the
material during the backfilling operations.
Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10-1
DPR09328

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Review subsurface investigations. A limited subsurface investigation has been performed by
Kleinfelder. A geotechnical report from that investigation is available at the Engineer’s office.
However, the precise profile of soil and rock strata beneath this site is not known.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. STRUCTURAL EARTH BACKFILL: Structural backfill shall be Class 4 Earth Fill as specified
in Section 31 05 13,SOILS FOR EARTHWORK.
B. TOPSOIL: Topsoil shall be Class 12 Earth Fill as specified in Section 31 05 13, SOILS FOR
EARTHWORK.
C. FINE-GRADED GRANULAR MATERIAL: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel,
and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch
sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and 5 to 15 percent passing No. 200 sieve;
maximum plasticity index of 7; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for
fine aggregates.
2.02 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
Compaction equipment shall conform to the following requirements and shall be utilized as
specified herein.
A. PNEUMATIC ROLLERS
Pneumatic rollers shall have a minimum of four (4) wheels equipped with pneumatic tires.
The tires shall be such size and ply as can be maintained at tire pressures between 80 and
100 pounds per square inch for a 25,000 pound wheel load during roller operations. The
roller wheels shall be located abreast and be designed so that each wheel will carry
approximately equal load in transversing uneven ground. The spacing of the wheels shall be
such that the distance between the nearest edges of adjacent tires will not be greater than
50% of the tire width of a single tire at the operating pressure of a 25,000 pound wheel load.
The roller shall be provided with a body suitable for ballast loading such that the load per
wheel may be varied, from 18,000 to 25,000 pounds. The roller shall be towed at speeds not
to exceed ten (10) miles per hour. The character and efficiency of this equipment shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
B. VIBRATORY ROLLERS
Vibratory rollers shall have a total static weight of not less than 20,000 pounds, with at least
90% of the weight transmitted to the ground through a single smooth drum when the roller is
standing in a level position. The diameter of the drum shall be between 5 and 5.5 feet and the
width between 6 and 9 feet. The unsprung weight of the drum, shaft, and internal mechanism
shall not be less than 12,000 pounds. The frequency of vibration during operation shall be
between 1,100 and 1,500 i.e., and dynamic force shall not be less than 40,000 pounds at
1,400 i.e. No backing of the vibratory roller will be allowed on the embankment unless the
vibrating mechanism is capable of being reversed. Self-propelled and towed vibratory rollers
shall be operated at speeds not exceeding 3 miles per hour and 1.5 miles per hour,
respectively.
C. POWER HAND TAMPERS AND VIBRATORY PLATE HAND COMPACTORS
Compaction of material in areas where it is impracticable to use a roller or tractor shall be
performed with approved power hand tampers, vibratory plate hand compactors, or other
approved equipment. Approval shall be based upon performance in a test section.
Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10-2
DPR09328

3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
Clear and grub the area to be excavated prior to the start of excavation.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. When footing concrete or masonry is to rest upon rock, remove the rock to a depth sufficient
to expose sound rock. Level off or cut the rock to approximate grades, and roughen the area.
When footing concrete or masonry is to rest on an excavated surface other than rock, take
care not to disturb the bottom of the excavation, and do not make final removal of the
foundation material to grade until just before the concrete or masonry is placed.
B. For footings where the soil encountered at established footing grade is an unstable material,
use the following procedure unless other methods are specified: Remove unstable soil.
Carry the excavation at least 1' beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides.
Replace the unstable soil with compacted select fill. Place in uniform layers at a suitable
depth for compaction. Wet each layer if necessary and compact by rolling or tamping to
provide a stable foundation for the structure.
C. When unfeasible to construct a stable footing as outlined above, construct footing by the use
of special materials, such as flexible base, cement stabilized base, cement stabilized backfill,
or other material, as directed by the Engineer.
D. Perform excavation to permit surfaces to be brought to final line and grade within + or - 0.1
foot. Restore over-break at the Contractor's expense. In general, perform excavation in
open-cut from the surface of the ground and at the line and grade indicated.
E. The sides of the excavation, from the bottom of the excavation to the top of the ground shall
be supported in accordance with OSHA requirements. Maintain the supports throughout
construction. Remove supports after the completion of the work.
3.03 DEWATERING OF SITE
Pumping or bailing from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in a manner which
precludes the possibility of movement of water through or alongside any concrete being placed.
No pumping or bailing shall be permitted during the placing of structural concrete, or for a period
of at least twenty-four (24) hours thereafter, unless from a suitable sump separated from the
concrete work by a water-tight wall. Pumping or bailing during placement of seal concrete shall
be only to the extent necessary to maintain a static head of water within a cofferdam. Do not start
pumping or bailing to de-water a sealed cofferdam until the seal has aged at least thirty-six (36)
hours.
3.04 PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL
A. GENERAL
1. Backfill excavated spaces and areas not occupied by the permanent structure, except
that no backfill shall be placed against any structure until the concrete has reached its 28
day compressive strength or seven (7) days whichever is longer. Do not place backfill
adjacent to support walls until the top slab has been in place at least four (4) days.
2. Take care to prevent wedging action when placing backfill around structures. If backfill is
to be placed on two (2) or more sides of the structure or facility, simultaneously place the
backfill on all sides to avoid uneven loading on the structure.
3. Do not permit rollers to operate within 3' of structures.
Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10-3
DPR09328

4. Maximum placement lifts measured in the loose condition are as follows:
a. 9-inches when heavy compaction equipment is used.
b. 4-inches when hand-directed compaction equipment is used.
5. Subgrade preparation for slab-on-grade
a. Provide a 3-inch layer of compacted FINE-GRADED GRANULAR MATERIAL.
B. MOISTURE CONTROL
1. GENERAL
The materials in each layer of the fill shall uniformly contain the amount of moisture within
the limits specified below necessary to obtain the maximum dry density for the soil.
Compact Class 1 and Class 2 Earth Fill with a moisture content of at or within five (5)
percentage points wet of optimum moisture content. Compact Class 3, Class 4, and
Class 5 Earth Fill with a moisture content within two (2) percentage points dry to five (5)
percentage points wet of optimum moisture content. The moisture content ranges
specified above for the various classes of earth fill represent maximum upper and lower
limits of the particular range. Determination of the maximum dry density-optimum
moisture shall be by one (1) or more of the following ASTM procedures: D-1556 or D-
6938. Completely cohesionless materials which are to be compacted to a specified
relative density shall be at a moisture content which will allow use of the specified
compaction equipment and consistent achievement of the specified density.
2. MOISTURE CONTROL DURING PLACEMENT
After spreading the soil, adjust the moisture content of the soil if necessary by either
aeration or the addition of water to bring the moisture content within the range specified.
Uniformly distribute the moisture content throughout the layer of soil to be compacted. In
order to accomplish this distribution, thoroughly mix the layer of soil by disking, harrowing,
or by the use of a power-driven pulverizer. Should the surface of a previously compacted
layer become dry due to exposure to the elements, appropriately wet surface of the
compacted layer prior to placing the succeeding layer of soil, and properly disk or harrow
the surface. Should a layer of soil be over wet, allow the layer to dry to a proper moisture
content prior to compacting. Should the surface of a layer become smooth and hard,
roughen the surface by scarifying, and wet the surface if necessary prior to placing the
next layer of soil. Reprocess any layer which becomes damaged by weather conditions to
meet the specification requirements. There shall be no additional payment made for such
reprocessing.
C. COMPACTION
1. Compaction shall be by power hand equipment or rubber tired equipment, provided the
rubber tired equipment does no damage. Compaction by power hand equipment or
rubber tired equipment shall be completed such that there will be a 24" overlap by roller
compaction.
2. Compact the Class 1 and Class 2 Earth Fill zones by a minimum of eight (8) passes with
a tamping roller. Compact the Class 3, Class 4, and Class 5 Earth Fill zones by a
minimum of eight (8) passes with a tamping roller or by a minimum of four (4) passes with
a tamping roller, followed by a minimum of four (4) passes with a pneumatic roller. A
vibratory roller shall be required if the material is sandy and if requested by the Engineer.
A pass shall consist of one (1) trip over the area being compacted. The front and rear
axle rollers on self propelled models shall only be considered as one (1) pass per trip.
The initial and final area to be rolled shall each have eight (8) passes. Stagger passes
between the initial and final area in order to establish overlapping with at least eight (8)
passes at all locations. Approve the exact method based upon the test section.
Dumping, spreading, sprinkling, and compacting may be performed at the same time at
different points along a section where there is sufficient area to permit these operations to
proceed simultaneously.
Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10-4
DPR09328

3. Areas of the fill being compacted with power hand tampers or vibratory plate hand
compactors shall receive a minimum of eight (8) passes of the equipment with an overlap
of 50% of the equipment base plate width.
4. The in-place density of Class 1 through Class 5 Earth Fill shall not be less than 95% of
maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698, Standard Proctor, except compact
the top 12" of fill underneath roadways and parking areas to not less than 100% of
maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698, Standard Proctor. In areas cut
underneath roadways and parking areas scarify and re-compact the top 8" of the
subgrade within the specified moisture content, to not less than 100% of maximum dry
density as determined by ASTM D-698, Standard Proctor.
5. Compact cohesionless materials on which are not practical to control the density by
proctor methods to a minimum of 75% relative density as determined by ASTM D-4253
and ASTM D-4254. At the discretion of the Engineer, an alternate method of determining
relative density may be used which has been correlated with methods ASTM D-4253 and
ASTM D-4254.
6. If necessary, to achieve the specified density, increase the number of passes of the
compaction equipment, and/or modify the weight of the compaction equipment.
7. Regardless of the density achieved, the number of passes of the compaction equipment
shall not be less than eight (8).
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
The Owner is responsible for the costs involved in providing an approved testing laboratory to
perform quality control testing of backfill operations. The testing laboratory shall make tests of inplace
density in accordance with ASTM Standards. The testing laboratory shall monitor backfill
operation continuously or at intervals acceptable to the Owner and Engineer at structures. It shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the testing laboratory before backfill operations
begin.
1. Unless noted otherwise, in-place density tests shall be conducted at a rate of one test per
3,000 square feet for every lift.
END OF SECTION
Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10-5
DPR09328